| 1 | <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
| 2 | <!DOCTYPE article PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.5//EN"
|
| 3 | "/usr/share/xml/docbook/schema/dtd/4.5/docbookx.dtd">
|
| 4 | <article lang="en">
|
| 5 | <title>Auto Multiple Choice</title>
|
| 6 |
|
| 7 | <articleinfo>
|
| 8 | <title>Auto Multiple Choice</title>
|
| 9 |
|
| 10 | <subtitle>Design of MCQ tests with automated correction and
|
| 11 | grading</subtitle>
|
| 12 |
|
| 13 | <abstract>
|
| 14 | <para>AMC is a set of utilities allowing the use of MCQ written in plain
|
| 15 | text or LaTeX, and their automated correction and grading from scans of
|
| 16 | the answer sheets using Optical Mark Recognition (OMR). This document
|
| 17 | describes its use (for the version
|
| 18 | @/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@~@/PACKAGE_V_VC/@).</para>
|
| 19 |
|
| 20 | <para>The AMC project is hosted by <ulink
|
| 21 | url="http://gna.org/">Gna !</ulink> : you can find the AMC web-site
|
| 22 | there <ulink
|
| 23 | url="http://home.gna.org/auto-qcm/">http://home.gna.org/auto-qcm/</ulink>,
|
| 24 | and the web-page where the project is hosted there <ulink
|
| 25 | url="https://bitbucket.org/auto-multiple-choice/auto-multiple-choice">https://bitbucket.org/auto-multiple-choice/auto-multiple-choice</ulink>.</para>
|
| 26 | </abstract>
|
| 27 |
|
| 28 | <author>
|
| 29 | <firstname>Alexis</firstname>
|
| 30 |
|
| 31 | <affiliation>
|
| 32 | <address><email>paamc@passoire.fr</email></address>
|
| 33 | </affiliation>
|
| 34 |
|
| 35 | <surname>Bienvenüe</surname>
|
| 36 |
|
| 37 | <contrib>Main author</contrib>
|
| 38 | </author>
|
| 39 |
|
| 40 | <author>
|
| 41 | <firstname>Anirvan</firstname>
|
| 42 |
|
| 43 | <surname>Sarkar</surname>
|
| 44 |
|
| 45 | <contrib>Author and Editor</contrib>
|
| 46 | </author>
|
| 47 |
|
| 48 | <editor>
|
| 49 | <firstname>Hiroto</firstname>
|
| 50 |
|
| 51 | <surname>Kagotani</surname>
|
| 52 |
|
| 53 | <contrib>Editor</contrib>
|
| 54 | </editor>
|
| 55 |
|
| 56 | <copyright>
|
| 57 | <year>2008-2013</year>
|
| 58 |
|
| 59 | <holder>Alexis Bienvenüe</holder>
|
| 60 | </copyright>
|
| 61 |
|
| 62 | <othercredit class="translator">
|
| 63 | <surname>Bérard</surname>
|
| 64 |
|
| 65 | <firstname>Jean</firstname>
|
| 66 |
|
| 67 | <contrib>Translation from French</contrib>
|
| 68 | </othercredit>
|
| 69 |
|
| 70 | <othercredit class="translator">
|
| 71 | <surname>Khaznadar</surname>
|
| 72 |
|
| 73 | <firstname>Georges</firstname>
|
| 74 |
|
| 75 | <contrib>Translation from French</contrib>
|
| 76 | </othercredit>
|
| 77 |
|
| 78 | <legalnotice>
|
| 79 | <para>This document can be used according to the terms of the GNU
|
| 80 | General Public License, version 2 or later.</para>
|
| 81 | </legalnotice>
|
| 82 | </articleinfo>
|
| 83 |
|
| 84 | <sect1>
|
| 85 | <title>License</title>
|
| 86 |
|
| 87 | <para>Auto Multiple Choice is free software: you can redistribute it
|
| 88 | and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
| 89 | published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 2 of the
|
| 90 | License, or (at your option) any later version.</para>
|
| 91 |
|
| 92 | <para>This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
|
| 93 | WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
|
| 94 | or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
|
| 95 | for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General
|
| 96 | Public License along with this program. If not, see <ulink
|
| 97 | url="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/">http://www.gnu.org/licenses/</ulink>.</para>
|
| 98 | </sect1>
|
| 99 |
|
| 100 | <sect1 id="prerequis">
|
| 101 | <title>Prerequisites</title>
|
| 102 |
|
| 103 | <sect2>
|
| 104 | <title>Operating system</title>
|
| 105 |
|
| 106 | <para>The AMC utilities have been written for Linux. They might be
|
| 107 | adapted to MAC OS X or Windows without too many difficulties, but I
|
| 108 | won't do that in the near future. Please contact me if you are
|
| 109 | interested to do it : I can help you a little, and I will include
|
| 110 | changes in AMC if necessary.</para>
|
| 111 | </sect2>
|
| 112 |
|
| 113 | <sect2>
|
| 114 | <title>Software</title>
|
| 115 |
|
| 116 | <note>
|
| 117 | <para>If you install AMC with deb or RPM package (on debian, Ubuntu
|
| 118 | and derivatives, Mandriva, openSUSE, Fedora), every software used by
|
| 119 | AMC will be automatically installed.</para>
|
| 120 | </note>
|
| 121 |
|
| 122 | <para>The main packages/software that are required for the use of AMC
|
| 123 | are the following:</para>
|
| 124 |
|
| 125 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 126 | <listitem>
|
| 127 | <para>LaTeX</para>
|
| 128 | </listitem>
|
| 129 |
|
| 130 | <listitem>
|
| 131 | <para>ImageMagick</para>
|
| 132 | </listitem>
|
| 133 |
|
| 134 | <listitem>
|
| 135 | <para>Perl, together with Gtk2-Perl and Glade::XML for the graphical
|
| 136 | user interface</para>
|
| 137 | </listitem>
|
| 138 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 139 |
|
| 140 | <sect3>
|
| 141 | <title>Recommended versions for software used by AMC</title>
|
| 142 |
|
| 143 | <para>A few bugs in old versions of software used by AMC are
|
| 144 | particularly detrimental to its operating normally:</para>
|
| 145 |
|
| 146 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 147 | <listitem>
|
| 148 | <para>With old versions of <package>Net::CUPS</package> (debian
|
| 149 | package <package>libnet-cups-perl</package>), the command for
|
| 150 | printing the test sheets leads to a premature exit from the AMC
|
| 151 | graphical user interface. This bug is fixed in versions 0.61 and
|
| 152 | later of <package>Net::CUPS</package>.</para>
|
| 153 | </listitem>
|
| 154 |
|
| 155 | <listitem>
|
| 156 | <para>With old versions of ImageMagick, the merging of corrected
|
| 157 | answer sheets into a single PDF file per student does not work
|
| 158 | when answer sheets comprise more than one page. This bug is fixed
|
| 159 | in versions 6.5.5 ad later of ImageMagick.</para>
|
| 160 | </listitem>
|
| 161 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 162 | </sect3>
|
| 163 | </sect2>
|
| 164 |
|
| 165 | <sect2>
|
| 166 | <title>LaTeX</title>
|
| 167 |
|
| 168 | <para>From version 1.1 of AMC, it is not mandatory anymore to write your
|
| 169 | questionnaires using LaTeX language (see <xref linkend="AMC-TXT"/> for a
|
| 170 | plain text alternative syntax). However, LaTeX is still the native AMC
|
| 171 | language for questionnaires descriptions, and allows the user to design
|
| 172 | his questionnaires with tremendous freedom. The templates that are
|
| 173 | provided should allow those who are not deterred by LaTeX format to
|
| 174 | quickly start writing their own MCQs.</para>
|
| 175 | </sect2>
|
| 176 | </sect1>
|
| 177 |
|
| 178 | <sect1 id="usagenotes">
|
| 179 | <title>Usage notes</title>
|
| 180 |
|
| 181 | <sect2>
|
| 182 | <title>Numerical limitations</title>
|
| 183 |
|
| 184 | <para>In the present version (starting with version 0.156), the maximum
|
| 185 | number of students per test is limited to 4 095, and the maximum number
|
| 186 | of pages per test is limited to 63 ( Modifiable default values, see
|
| 187 | <xref endterm="binary.code.title" linkend="binary.code"/>).</para>
|
| 188 |
|
| 189 | <para>The maximum number of answers for a given question is limited to
|
| 190 | 199 (Unmodifiable default value).</para>
|
| 191 |
|
| 192 | <para>LaTeX's own limitations may make compilation impossible, producing
|
| 193 | e.g. a « <errortext>No room for a new \toks</errortext> » error. In that
|
| 194 | case, try again using the package <package>etex</package>, thanks to the
|
| 195 | <code>\usepackage{etex}</code> command.</para>
|
| 196 | </sect2>
|
| 197 |
|
| 198 | <sect2>
|
| 199 | <title>Versions</title>
|
| 200 |
|
| 201 | <para>Even though it should not have too many consequences, it is
|
| 202 | recommended not to change the program version while working with a given
|
| 203 | project (between the time when the test sheets are printed and the time
|
| 204 | when tests are corrected and graded). There are a few modifications
|
| 205 | which may interfere with AMC operating normally if you apply them while
|
| 206 | working with a given project:</para>
|
| 207 |
|
| 208 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 209 | <listitem>
|
| 210 | <para>If you have compiled and printed with a version of AMC earlier
|
| 211 | than 0.155, and then handle the project with version 0.156 or later,
|
| 212 | add the option <option>versionA</option> in the reference to the
|
| 213 | package <package>automultiplechoice</package> in the LaTeX file.
|
| 214 | Example:</para>
|
| 215 |
|
| 216 | <programlisting>\usepackage[box,completemulti,versionA]{automultiplechoice}</programlisting>
|
| 217 | </listitem>
|
| 218 |
|
| 219 | <listitem>
|
| 220 | <para>From version 0.262 on, the drawing of the checkboxes changed
|
| 221 | to be slightly larger, which may alter the layout of the test
|
| 222 | sheets.</para>
|
| 223 | </listitem>
|
| 224 |
|
| 225 | <listitem>
|
| 226 | <para>From version 0.267, if you want to produce A4 format test
|
| 227 | sheets, you have to state it explicitly in the LaTeX file:</para>
|
| 228 |
|
| 229 | <programlisting>\documentclass[a4paper]{article} </programlisting>
|
| 230 | </listitem>
|
| 231 |
|
| 232 | <listitem>
|
| 233 | <para>From version 0.394, if your LaTeX code needs package
|
| 234 | <package>graphicx</package>, you have to load it explicitly (earlier
|
| 235 | versions of AMC loaded it).</para>
|
| 236 | </listitem>
|
| 237 |
|
| 238 | <listitem>
|
| 239 | <para>The LaTeX command <command>\AMCcode</command> was rewritten in
|
| 240 | version 0.518. It is now more robust and configurable, but you will
|
| 241 | have to adapt the LaTeX sources you wrote for older versions to keep
|
| 242 | the same layout.</para>
|
| 243 | </listitem>
|
| 244 |
|
| 245 | <listitem>
|
| 246 | <para>From version 1.1.0, all AMC data is stored in SQLite databases
|
| 247 | instead of lots of XML files. The first time you open a project, old
|
| 248 | XML files will be converted to the new format.</para>
|
| 249 | </listitem>
|
| 250 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 251 | </sect2>
|
| 252 |
|
| 253 | <sect2>
|
| 254 | <title>Installation</title>
|
| 255 |
|
| 256 | <para>With debian, Ubuntu, or a derived operating system, you can use
|
| 257 | the debian official repository and ubuntu AMC repositories. On Mandriva,
|
| 258 | openSUSE or Fedora, you can use prebuilt RPM packages. The installation
|
| 259 | procedure is described on the <ulink
|
| 260 | url="http://home.gna.org/auto-qcm/download">AMC web-site</ulink>.</para>
|
| 261 |
|
| 262 | <para>You can also download the source code archive on the project
|
| 263 | <ulink url="http://download.gna.org/auto-qcm/">download space</ulink>,
|
| 264 | then use the following commands in a terminal:</para>
|
| 265 |
|
| 266 | <screen>tar xvzf auto-multiple-choice_xxxx_precomp.tar.gz
|
| 267 | cd auto-multiple-choice-xxx
|
| 268 | make
|
| 269 | sudo make install</screen>
|
| 270 | </sect2>
|
| 271 |
|
| 272 | <sect2>
|
| 273 | <title>Access</title>
|
| 274 |
|
| 275 | <para>Once the installation is made, the graphical user interface can be
|
| 276 | launched by choosing <menuchoice>
|
| 277 | <guimenu>Applications</guimenu>
|
| 278 |
|
| 279 | <guisubmenu>Education</guisubmenu>
|
| 280 |
|
| 281 | <guimenuitem>Auto Multiple Choice</guimenuitem>
|
| 282 | </menuchoice> in the Gnome general menu (or its KDE or other analog),
|
| 283 | but one can also use the <userinput>auto-multiple-choice</userinput>
|
| 284 | command.</para>
|
| 285 | </sect2>
|
| 286 | </sect1>
|
| 287 |
|
| 288 | <sect1 id="AMC-TXT">
|
| 289 | <title>AMC-TXT syntax</title>
|
| 290 |
|
| 291 | <para>For users who are not ready to learn LaTeX (if not already familiar
|
| 292 | with this language), AMC includes a filter to process simple plain text
|
| 293 | files in a particular format, named AMC-TXT. This section is devoted to
|
| 294 | detail the syntax of AMC-TXT files. If you prefer use LaTeX to gain a
|
| 295 | fine-control over your questionnaires, skip to next section.</para>
|
| 296 |
|
| 297 | <para>Let us begin with a simple example:</para>
|
| 298 |
|
| 299 | |
| 300 | DESC: A very simple example (from the documentation) using the AMC-TXT format. This is a very simple plain text format to write your questionnaires without any LaTeX knowledge.-->
|
| 301 |
|
| 302 | <programlisting id="modeles-simple-txt.txt"># AMC-TXT source file
|
| 303 | Title: My first AMC questionnaire
|
| 304 |
|
| 305 | Presentation: Please answer the following questions
|
| 306 | the best you can.
|
| 307 |
|
| 308 | * What is the capital city of Cameroon?
|
| 309 | + Yaounde
|
| 310 | - Douala
|
| 311 | - Kribi
|
| 312 |
|
| 313 | ** From the following numbers, which are positive?
|
| 314 | - -2
|
| 315 | + 2
|
| 316 | + 10</programlisting>
|
| 317 |
|
| 318 | <important>
|
| 319 | <para>The file that contains your questionnaire must be a plain text
|
| 320 | file, UTF-8 encoded. This is the default encoding of several text
|
| 321 | editors, like <command>gedit</command>. Don't use a text editor that can
|
| 322 | format your text with bold, images, and so on, like
|
| 323 | OpenOffice/LibreOffice, or equivalent: these save your text with a lot
|
| 324 | of other data, and AMC won't be able to read it.</para>
|
| 325 | </important>
|
| 326 |
|
| 327 | <note>
|
| 328 | <para>The default font that will be used is <ulink
|
| 329 | url="http://www.linuxlibertine.org/">libertine</ulink>, an open source
|
| 330 | font that contains characters for a lot of languages. You have to
|
| 331 | install this font or choose another one (see options below). If you
|
| 332 | install AMC with a debian/ubuntu package, this font will be install
|
| 333 | together as a recommended package.</para>
|
| 334 | </note>
|
| 335 |
|
| 336 | <para>You already understand AMC-TXT structure: some general options
|
| 337 | first, and then questions.</para>
|
| 338 |
|
| 339 | <sect2>
|
| 340 | <title>Comments</title>
|
| 341 |
|
| 342 | <para>You can write some comments inside your AMC-TXT source file in
|
| 343 | lines <emphasis>beginning</emphasis> with a `<code>#</code>'. These
|
| 344 | lines won't be considered by AMC.</para>
|
| 345 | </sect2>
|
| 346 |
|
| 347 | <sect2>
|
| 348 | <title>General options</title>
|
| 349 |
|
| 350 | <para>Here are the options you can use (in any order):</para>
|
| 351 |
|
| 352 | <variablelist>
|
| 353 | <varlistentry>
|
| 354 | <term>Lang:</term>
|
| 355 |
|
| 356 | <listitem>
|
| 357 | <para>use it to specify a language the questionnaire is written
|
| 358 | in. At present, only DE (German), ES (Spanish), FR (French), IT
|
| 359 | (Italian), NL (Dutch), NO (Norwegian), PT (portuguese), JA
|
| 360 | (Japanese, see <xref linkend="txt-japanese"/>) and AR (Arabic, see
|
| 361 | <xref linkend="txt-arabic"/>) are supported. Without this option,
|
| 362 | English will be selected. You can also define the localized string
|
| 363 | used for another language (see the <option>L-xxx</option>
|
| 364 | options).</para>
|
| 365 | </listitem>
|
| 366 | </varlistentry>
|
| 367 |
|
| 368 | <varlistentry>
|
| 369 | <term>PaperSize:</term>
|
| 370 |
|
| 371 | <listitem>
|
| 372 | <para>Sets the paper size. Possible values are <code>A3</code>,
|
| 373 | <code>A4</code>, <code>A5</code>, <code>A6</code>,
|
| 374 | <code>B3</code>, <code>B4</code>, <code>B5</code>,
|
| 375 | <code>B6</code>, <code>letter</code>, <code>legal</code>,
|
| 376 | <code>ANSIA</code>, <code>ANSIB</code>, <code>ANSIC</code>,
|
| 377 | <code>ANSID</code>, <code>ANSIE</code>.</para>
|
| 378 | </listitem>
|
| 379 | </varlistentry>
|
| 380 |
|
| 381 | <varlistentry>
|
| 382 | <term>Title:</term>
|
| 383 |
|
| 384 | <listitem>
|
| 385 | <para>The exam title, written on top of the sheet.</para>
|
| 386 | </listitem>
|
| 387 | </varlistentry>
|
| 388 |
|
| 389 | <varlistentry>
|
| 390 | <term>Presentation:</term>
|
| 391 |
|
| 392 | <listitem>
|
| 393 | <para>A text that presents the exam (length, rules...).</para>
|
| 394 | </listitem>
|
| 395 | </varlistentry>
|
| 396 |
|
| 397 | <varlistentry>
|
| 398 | <term>ShuffleQuestions:</term>
|
| 399 |
|
| 400 | <listitem>
|
| 401 | <para>If 1 (default), questions will be shuffled so that their
|
| 402 | order is different from one sheet to the other. If 0, the
|
| 403 | questions will always show with the same order as in your
|
| 404 | file.</para>
|
| 405 | </listitem>
|
| 406 | </varlistentry>
|
| 407 |
|
| 408 | <varlistentry>
|
| 409 | <term>Code:</term>
|
| 410 |
|
| 411 | <listitem>
|
| 412 | <para>Give a positive integer value <replaceable>n</replaceable>
|
| 413 | to add boxes so that students will be able to code their student
|
| 414 | number on their sheets, with <replaceable>n</replaceable>
|
| 415 | digits.</para>
|
| 416 | </listitem>
|
| 417 | </varlistentry>
|
| 418 |
|
| 419 | <varlistentry>
|
| 420 | <term>CodeDigitsDirection:</term>
|
| 421 |
|
| 422 | <listitem>
|
| 423 | <para>Sets the direction for code's digits boxes (either
|
| 424 | <code>vertical</code> or <code>horizontal</code>). If unset, AMC
|
| 425 | will choose the direction from the number of digits (horizontal
|
| 426 | for small number of digits, and vertical for high number of
|
| 427 | digits).</para>
|
| 428 | </listitem>
|
| 429 | </varlistentry>
|
| 430 |
|
| 431 | <varlistentry>
|
| 432 | <term>Columns:</term>
|
| 433 |
|
| 434 | <listitem>
|
| 435 | <para>Give a positive integer value <replaceable>n</replaceable>
|
| 436 | to get a subject with <replaceable>n</replaceable> columns.</para>
|
| 437 | </listitem>
|
| 438 | </varlistentry>
|
| 439 |
|
| 440 | <varlistentry>
|
| 441 | <term>CompleteMulti:</term>
|
| 442 |
|
| 443 | <listitem>
|
| 444 | <para>If 1 (default), for multiple questions (those for which
|
| 445 | zero, one or several answers are correct), an answer "None of
|
| 446 | these answers are correct" will be added. Without it, it should be
|
| 447 | impossible to make a difference between "the student didn't answer
|
| 448 | for this question" and "the student thinks no answer is correct
|
| 449 | for this question". If you don't want this answer to be added, set
|
| 450 | this option to 0.</para>
|
| 451 | </listitem>
|
| 452 | </varlistentry>
|
| 453 |
|
| 454 | <varlistentry>
|
| 455 | <term>L-None:</term>
|
| 456 |
|
| 457 | <listitem>
|
| 458 | <para>Give a string to replace <emphasis>None of these answers are
|
| 459 | correct</emphasis> (see previous option).</para>
|
| 460 | </listitem>
|
| 461 | </varlistentry>
|
| 462 |
|
| 463 | <varlistentry>
|
| 464 | <term>QuestionBlocks:</term>
|
| 465 |
|
| 466 | <listitem>
|
| 467 | <para>If 1 (default), all questions will be enclosed in a
|
| 468 | invisible frame that prevents it to be split across several
|
| 469 | columns or pages. If 0, questions are allowed to be split if
|
| 470 | necessary: that can save pages at the cost of readability.</para>
|
| 471 | </listitem>
|
| 472 | </varlistentry>
|
| 473 |
|
| 474 | <varlistentry>
|
| 475 | <term>L-Question:</term>
|
| 476 |
|
| 477 | <listitem>
|
| 478 | <para>Give a translation of <emphasis>Question</emphasis> in your
|
| 479 | questionnaire, if you need.</para>
|
| 480 | </listitem>
|
| 481 | </varlistentry>
|
| 482 |
|
| 483 | <varlistentry>
|
| 484 | <term>L-Name:</term>
|
| 485 |
|
| 486 | <listitem>
|
| 487 | <para>Give a translation of <emphasis>Name and surname</emphasis>,
|
| 488 | a text written in the box where students are to write their
|
| 489 | identity.</para>
|
| 490 | </listitem>
|
| 491 | </varlistentry>
|
| 492 |
|
| 493 | <varlistentry>
|
| 494 | <term>L-Student:</term>
|
| 495 |
|
| 496 | <listitem>
|
| 497 | <para>Small text that asks students to code their student numbers
|
| 498 | and write their name, when <option>Code</option> option is
|
| 499 | used.</para>
|
| 500 | </listitem>
|
| 501 | </varlistentry>
|
| 502 |
|
| 503 | <varlistentry>
|
| 504 | <term>TitleWidth:</term>
|
| 505 |
|
| 506 | <listitem>
|
| 507 | <para>Width of the title zone, when <option>Code:</option> is not
|
| 508 | used. Default value is <code>.47\linewidth</code>.</para>
|
| 509 | </listitem>
|
| 510 | </varlistentry>
|
| 511 |
|
| 512 | <varlistentry>
|
| 513 | <term>NameFieldWidth:</term>
|
| 514 |
|
| 515 | <listitem>
|
| 516 | <para>Width of the name field part. Usual LaTeX dimensions can be
|
| 517 | used. The default value is <code>5.8cm</code> when
|
| 518 | <option>Code:</option> is used, and <code>.47\linewidth</code>
|
| 519 | without <option>Code:</option>.</para>
|
| 520 | </listitem>
|
| 521 | </varlistentry>
|
| 522 |
|
| 523 | <varlistentry>
|
| 524 | <term>NameFieldLines:</term>
|
| 525 |
|
| 526 | <listitem>
|
| 527 | <para>Number of lines in the name field box. Default is
|
| 528 | <code>2</code> when <option>Code:</option> is used, and
|
| 529 | <code>1</code> otherwise.</para>
|
| 530 | </listitem>
|
| 531 | </varlistentry>
|
| 532 |
|
| 533 | <varlistentry>
|
| 534 | <term>NameFieldLinespace:</term>
|
| 535 |
|
| 536 | <listitem>
|
| 537 | <para>Line space in the name field box. Defaut value is
|
| 538 | <code>.5em</code>.</para>
|
| 539 | </listitem>
|
| 540 | </varlistentry>
|
| 541 |
|
| 542 | <varlistentry>
|
| 543 | <term>ManualDuplex:</term>
|
| 544 |
|
| 545 | <listitem>
|
| 546 | <para>If 1 (this is not the default value), each subject will
|
| 547 | consist of an even number of pages, so that the user can manually
|
| 548 | print the PDF subject for all students in one go in duplex
|
| 549 | mode.</para>
|
| 550 | </listitem>
|
| 551 | </varlistentry>
|
| 552 |
|
| 553 | <varlistentry>
|
| 554 | <term>SingleSided:</term>
|
| 555 |
|
| 556 | <listitem>
|
| 557 | <para>If 1 (this is not the default value), no blank page will be
|
| 558 | added between the question and the separate answer sheet, even if
|
| 559 | the question has an odd number of pages. This mode can be useful
|
| 560 | when the subjects are printed single-sided, or when it is not
|
| 561 | necessary to separate question and answer sheet.</para>
|
| 562 | </listitem>
|
| 563 | </varlistentry>
|
| 564 |
|
| 565 | <varlistentry>
|
| 566 | <term>BoxColor:</term>
|
| 567 |
|
| 568 | <listitem>
|
| 569 | <para>Color of the boxes to be filled by the students. This allows
|
| 570 | to print the boxes with some color that won't disturb too much the
|
| 571 | data capture (for example <emphasis>red</emphasis>, but some light
|
| 572 | gray can also be considered). The color has to be given as a valid
|
| 573 | <command>xcolor</command> color (see <command>xcolor</command>
|
| 574 | LaTeX package documentation for details), such as
|
| 575 | <emphasis>red</emphasis>, <emphasis>magenta</emphasis>,
|
| 576 | <emphasis>pink</emphasis>, <emphasis>lightgray</emphasis>,
|
| 577 | <emphasis>cyan</emphasis>, or in the form <code>#RRGGBB</code>,
|
| 578 | like <code>#FFBEC8</code> for some light red.</para>
|
| 579 | </listitem>
|
| 580 | </varlistentry>
|
| 581 |
|
| 582 | <varlistentry>
|
| 583 | <term>DefaultScoringS:</term>
|
| 584 |
|
| 585 | <listitem>
|
| 586 | <para>Default scoring strategy for simple questions (questions for
|
| 587 | which one and only one answer is correct). See <xref
|
| 588 | linkend="bareme"/> for details. The default value gives one point
|
| 589 | for the right answer, and zero for others.</para>
|
| 590 | </listitem>
|
| 591 | </varlistentry>
|
| 592 |
|
| 593 | <varlistentry>
|
| 594 | <term>DefaultScoringM:</term>
|
| 595 |
|
| 596 | <listitem>
|
| 597 | <para>Default scoring strategy for multiple questions (questions
|
| 598 | for which there can be zero, one or several correct answers). See
|
| 599 | <xref linkend="bareme"/> for details. The default value is
|
| 600 | <code>haut=2</code>, so that a perfect answer gives 2 points, and
|
| 601 | each error (ticking a box that should not be ticked, or leaving a
|
| 602 | box that should be ticked unticked) takes one point off (keeping
|
| 603 | the score non-negative).</para>
|
| 604 | </listitem>
|
| 605 | </varlistentry>
|
| 606 |
|
| 607 | <varlistentry>
|
| 608 | <term>LaTeX:</term>
|
| 609 |
|
| 610 | <listitem>
|
| 611 | <para>Set this option to 1 if you want to use LaTeX commands in
|
| 612 | your texts. This allows for example to insert mathematical
|
| 613 | formulas, like <code>$\sqrt{a+b}$</code>. If 0 (default), all your
|
| 614 | texts will be written unmodified.</para>
|
| 615 | </listitem>
|
| 616 | </varlistentry>
|
| 617 |
|
| 618 | <varlistentry>
|
| 619 | <term>LaTeX-Preambule:</term>
|
| 620 |
|
| 621 | <listitem>
|
| 622 | <para>Give commands you want to be added to the LaTeX preambule
|
| 623 | (for example <command>\usepackage</command> commands).</para>
|
| 624 | </listitem>
|
| 625 | </varlistentry>
|
| 626 |
|
| 627 | <varlistentry>
|
| 628 | <term>LaTeX-BeginDocument:</term>
|
| 629 |
|
| 630 | <listitem>
|
| 631 | <para>Give commands to be inserted at the beginning of the LaTeX
|
| 632 | <command>document</command> environment (for example macro
|
| 633 | definitions).</para>
|
| 634 | </listitem>
|
| 635 | </varlistentry>
|
| 636 |
|
| 637 | <varlistentry>
|
| 638 | <term>Disable:</term>
|
| 639 |
|
| 640 | <listitem>
|
| 641 | <para>Gives a comma-separated list of features to disable. Current
|
| 642 | implemented features are <code>images</code> (see <xref
|
| 643 | linkend="parse_images"/>), <code>embf</code> (see <xref
|
| 644 | linkend="parse_embf"/>) and <code>local_latex</code> (see <xref
|
| 645 | linkend="parse_local_latex"/>).</para>
|
| 646 | </listitem>
|
| 647 | </varlistentry>
|
| 648 |
|
| 649 | <varlistentry>
|
| 650 | <term>PackageOptions:</term>
|
| 651 |
|
| 652 | <listitem>
|
| 653 | <para>Gives some more options to pass to the automultiplechoice
|
| 654 | LaTeX package (see <xref linkend="sec.package.options"/>.</para>
|
| 655 | </listitem>
|
| 656 | </varlistentry>
|
| 657 | </variablelist>
|
| 658 |
|
| 659 | <sect3>
|
| 660 | <title>Separate answer sheet</title>
|
| 661 |
|
| 662 | <para>To use separate answer sheets for your questionnaire, consider
|
| 663 | the following options:</para>
|
| 664 |
|
| 665 | <variablelist>
|
| 666 | <varlistentry>
|
| 667 | <term>SeparateAnswerSheet:</term>
|
| 668 |
|
| 669 | <listitem>
|
| 670 | <para>If 1, a separate answer sheet will be added.</para>
|
| 671 | </listitem>
|
| 672 | </varlistentry>
|
| 673 |
|
| 674 | <varlistentry>
|
| 675 | <term>AnswerSheetTitle:</term>
|
| 676 |
|
| 677 | <listitem>
|
| 678 | <para>Title of the answer sheet.</para>
|
| 679 | </listitem>
|
| 680 | </varlistentry>
|
| 681 |
|
| 682 | <varlistentry>
|
| 683 | <term>AnswerSheetPresentation:</term>
|
| 684 |
|
| 685 | <listitem>
|
| 686 | <para>Presentation of the answer sheet. For example, remind the
|
| 687 | students that the answers are to be given on this sheet
|
| 688 | <emphasis>only</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 689 | </listitem>
|
| 690 | </varlistentry>
|
| 691 |
|
| 692 | <varlistentry>
|
| 693 | <term>AnswerSheetColumns:</term>
|
| 694 |
|
| 695 | <listitem>
|
| 696 | <para>Number of columns for the answer sheet.</para>
|
| 697 | </listitem>
|
| 698 | </varlistentry>
|
| 699 |
|
| 700 | <varlistentry>
|
| 701 | <term>AutoMarks:</term>
|
| 702 |
|
| 703 | <listitem>
|
| 704 | <para>If 1, uses <option>automarks</option> option (see <xref
|
| 705 | linkend="sec.package.options"/>).</para>
|
| 706 | </listitem>
|
| 707 | </varlistentry>
|
| 708 | </variablelist>
|
| 709 | </sect3>
|
| 710 | </sect2>
|
| 711 |
|
| 712 | <sect2>
|
| 713 | <title>Questions</title>
|
| 714 |
|
| 715 | <para>Simple questions (questions for which one and only one answer is
|
| 716 | correct) begin with a <code>*</code> at the beginning of the line, and
|
| 717 | multiple questions (questions for which there can be zero, one or
|
| 718 | several correct answers) begin with a <code>**</code>. Insert then the
|
| 719 | question itself, and the choices, introduced with a <code>+</code> for
|
| 720 | correct ones and with a <code>-</code> for wrong ones.</para>
|
| 721 |
|
| 722 | <sect3>
|
| 723 | <title>Questions options</title>
|
| 724 |
|
| 725 | <para>Some options are available for questions. They must be separated
|
| 726 | by commas and enclosed by square brackets just after the leading
|
| 727 | <code>*</code>'s, as in the following example:</para>
|
| 728 |
|
| 729 | <programlisting>*[ordered,horiz,name=sum] How much are
|
| 730 | one plus one?
|
| 731 | - 0
|
| 732 | - 1
|
| 733 | + 2</programlisting>
|
| 734 |
|
| 735 | <para>Available options for questions:</para>
|
| 736 |
|
| 737 | <variablelist>
|
| 738 | <varlistentry>
|
| 739 | <term>horiz</term>
|
| 740 |
|
| 741 | <listitem>
|
| 742 | <para>present choices horizontally, not on separated
|
| 743 | lines.</para>
|
| 744 | </listitem>
|
| 745 | </varlistentry>
|
| 746 |
|
| 747 | <varlistentry>
|
| 748 | <term>columns=<replaceable>n</replaceable></term>
|
| 749 |
|
| 750 | <listitem>
|
| 751 | <para>make <replaceable>n</replaceable> columns for the
|
| 752 | choices.</para>
|
| 753 | </listitem>
|
| 754 | </varlistentry>
|
| 755 |
|
| 756 | <varlistentry>
|
| 757 | <term>ordered</term>
|
| 758 |
|
| 759 | <listitem>
|
| 760 | <para>don't shuffle the choices, keep the same order as in the
|
| 761 | description file.</para>
|
| 762 | </listitem>
|
| 763 | </varlistentry>
|
| 764 |
|
| 765 | <varlistentry>
|
| 766 | <term>id=<replaceable>xxxx</replaceable></term>
|
| 767 |
|
| 768 | <listitem>
|
| 769 | <para>Give a name to the question, so as to locate the
|
| 770 | corresponding results easily in the exported spreadsheets. This
|
| 771 | name must contain only simple characters, without accents and
|
| 772 | LaTeX special characters such as <code>_</code>, <code>^</code>,
|
| 773 | <code>%</code>...</para>
|
| 774 |
|
| 775 | <para><option>name</option> can also be used instead of
|
| 776 | <option>id</option> for compatibility with old versions, but you
|
| 777 | should prefer using <option>id</option>.</para>
|
| 778 | </listitem>
|
| 779 | </varlistentry>
|
| 780 |
|
| 781 | <varlistentry>
|
| 782 | <term>indicative</term>
|
| 783 |
|
| 784 | <listitem>
|
| 785 | <para>don't use this question score to compute the global
|
| 786 | student's score.</para>
|
| 787 | </listitem>
|
| 788 | </varlistentry>
|
| 789 |
|
| 790 | <varlistentry>
|
| 791 | <term>next</term>
|
| 792 |
|
| 793 | <listitem>
|
| 794 | <para>Use this option if you want the question to stay next to
|
| 795 | the previous one, even when using questions shuffling with
|
| 796 | <option>ShuffleQuestions</option> general option.</para>
|
| 797 | </listitem>
|
| 798 | </varlistentry>
|
| 799 |
|
| 800 | <varlistentry>
|
| 801 | <term>first</term>
|
| 802 |
|
| 803 | <listitem>
|
| 804 | <para>Use this option to place the question always at the
|
| 805 | beginning of the group (see <xref
|
| 806 | linkend="sec.txt-groups"/>).</para>
|
| 807 | </listitem>
|
| 808 | </varlistentry>
|
| 809 |
|
| 810 | <varlistentry>
|
| 811 | <term>last</term>
|
| 812 |
|
| 813 | <listitem>
|
| 814 | <para>Use this option to place the question always at the end of
|
| 815 | the group (see <xref linkend="sec.txt-groups"/>).</para>
|
| 816 | </listitem>
|
| 817 | </varlistentry>
|
| 818 | </variablelist>
|
| 819 | </sect3>
|
| 820 |
|
| 821 | <sect3>
|
| 822 | <title>Scoring strategy</title>
|
| 823 |
|
| 824 | <para>You can set the scoring strategy for a particular question or
|
| 825 | choice enclosing it with braces just after the leading characters
|
| 826 | (<code>*</code>, <code>**</code>, <code>+</code> or <code>-</code>)
|
| 827 | and the possible options, as in the following example. See <xref
|
| 828 | linkend="bareme"/> for details about the scoring strategy
|
| 829 | syntax.</para>
|
| 830 |
|
| 831 | <programlisting>*{b=2,m=-1} What is the capital city of France?
|
| 832 | + Paris
|
| 833 | - Lille
|
| 834 | - Marseille
|
| 835 | - Ouagadougou
|
| 836 | -{-2} New York
|
| 837 |
|
| 838 | **[ordered,horiz,name=positive]{haut=1} From the following numbers, which are positive?
|
| 839 | - -2
|
| 840 | + 2
|
| 841 | + 10
|
| 842 | </programlisting>
|
| 843 | </sect3>
|
| 844 |
|
| 845 | <sect3>
|
| 846 | <title>Open questions</title>
|
| 847 |
|
| 848 | <para>You can define open question giving options (see <xref
|
| 849 | linkend="openquestions"/>) enclosed with <code><</code> and
|
| 850 | <code>></code>, as in the following example:</para>
|
| 851 |
|
| 852 | <programlisting>*<lines=4> Describe the moon.
|
| 853 | -[O]{0} O
|
| 854 | -[P]{1} P
|
| 855 | +[V]{2} V</programlisting>
|
| 856 |
|
| 857 | <para>You should also consider using the following global
|
| 858 | options:</para>
|
| 859 |
|
| 860 | <variablelist>
|
| 861 | <varlistentry>
|
| 862 | <term>L-OpenText:</term>
|
| 863 |
|
| 864 | <listitem>
|
| 865 | <para>Text used to tell the student to write the answer on the
|
| 866 | separate answer sheet (if relevant).</para>
|
| 867 | </listitem>
|
| 868 | </varlistentry>
|
| 869 |
|
| 870 | <varlistentry>
|
| 871 | <term>L-OpenReserved:</term>
|
| 872 |
|
| 873 | <listitem>
|
| 874 | <para>Text to be written along the open questions boxes to tell
|
| 875 | the student not to consider these boxes.</para>
|
| 876 | </listitem>
|
| 877 | </varlistentry>
|
| 878 | </variablelist>
|
| 879 | </sect3>
|
| 880 | </sect2>
|
| 881 |
|
| 882 | <sect2>
|
| 883 | <title>Multi-line</title>
|
| 884 |
|
| 885 | <para>You can always continue some text on the next lines (even if some
|
| 886 | of them are empty), provided that these following lines cannot be
|
| 887 | considered as the beginning of an option definition, of a question or of
|
| 888 | a choice. As an example, consider the following question:</para>
|
| 889 |
|
| 890 | <programlisting>* How much are 2
|
| 891 | + 2?
|
| 892 | - 0
|
| 893 | + 4
|
| 894 | - 10</programlisting>
|
| 895 |
|
| 896 | <para>This is a correct AMC-TXT question. However, it won't be treated
|
| 897 | as you'd like to, because here the second line is not considered as
|
| 898 | being the following of the first one, but form the first choice of the
|
| 899 | question!</para>
|
| 900 |
|
| 901 | <para>A similar problem arises from the following AMC-TXT question,
|
| 902 | where `<code>Gershwin:</code>' is considered as a general option
|
| 903 | definition...</para>
|
| 904 |
|
| 905 | <programlisting>* You all know Georges
|
| 906 | Gershwin: he is a composer.
|
| 907 | When was he born?
|
| 908 | + in 1898
|
| 909 | - in 1892
|
| 910 | - in 1902</programlisting>
|
| 911 |
|
| 912 | <para>This is a correct way to write it:</para>
|
| 913 |
|
| 914 | <programlisting>* You all know Georges Gershwin:
|
| 915 | he is a composer.
|
| 916 | When was he born?
|
| 917 | + in 1898
|
| 918 | - in 1892
|
| 919 | - in 1902</programlisting>
|
| 920 |
|
| 921 | <para>Note that line breaks can be inserted leaving an empty line,
|
| 922 | as:</para>
|
| 923 |
|
| 924 | <programlisting>Presentation: Title
|
| 925 |
|
| 926 | Description of the exam.
|
| 927 |
|
| 928 | ** Difficult question.
|
| 929 |
|
| 930 | How many stars in the sky?
|
| 931 | - one
|
| 932 | - two
|
| 933 | - ten millions</programlisting>
|
| 934 | </sect2>
|
| 935 |
|
| 936 | <sect2>
|
| 937 | <title>Title</title>
|
| 938 |
|
| 939 | <para>To get a title, enclose it between <code>[==</code> and
|
| 940 | <code>==]</code>.</para>
|
| 941 | </sect2>
|
| 942 |
|
| 943 | <sect2 id="parse_embf">
|
| 944 | <title>Bold, italic</title>
|
| 945 |
|
| 946 | <para>To get <emphasis>bold</emphasis> text, enclose it between
|
| 947 | <code>[*</code> and <code>*]</code>. To get <emphasis>italic</emphasis>
|
| 948 | text, enclose it between <code>[_</code> and <code>_]</code>.</para>
|
| 949 |
|
| 950 | <programlisting>* What is the [*capital city*] of [_France_]?
|
| 951 | + Paris
|
| 952 | - Lille
|
| 953 | - Marseille</programlisting>
|
| 954 | </sect2>
|
| 955 |
|
| 956 | <sect2 id="parse_images">
|
| 957 | <title>Images</title>
|
| 958 |
|
| 959 | <para>You can add images in your document using the following
|
| 960 | syntax:</para>
|
| 961 |
|
| 962 | <programlisting>![height=2cm]images/bird.png!</programlisting>
|
| 963 |
|
| 964 | <para>Here, the image <filename>images/bird.png</filename> that is
|
| 965 | located in the project directory will be appended with 2cm height.
|
| 966 | Options that can be used inside the square brackets are those from the
|
| 967 | <command>\includegraphics</command> LaTeX command
|
| 968 | (<parameter>width=3cm</parameter> or
|
| 969 | <parameter>keepaspectratio</parameter> for example). To get a centered
|
| 970 | image that is three quarters of the line width, use</para>
|
| 971 |
|
| 972 | <programlisting>!{center}[width=.75\linewidth]images/map.pdf!</programlisting>
|
| 973 | </sect2>
|
| 974 |
|
| 975 | <sect2 id="parse_local_latex">
|
| 976 | <title>Pieces of LaTeX code</title>
|
| 977 |
|
| 978 | <para>You can include some small parts of LaTeX code in your document,
|
| 979 | including it in double square brackets, as in:</para>
|
| 980 |
|
| 981 | <programlisting>Questions with a [[\multiSymbole{}]] may have zero, one or more right answers.</programlisting>
|
| 982 | </sect2>
|
| 983 |
|
| 984 | <sect2 id="sec.txt-groups">
|
| 985 | <title>Questions groups</title>
|
| 986 |
|
| 987 | <para>You can group some question so that they stay together even when
|
| 988 | shuffling, with the following syntax:</para>
|
| 989 |
|
| 990 | <programlisting>*( Questions about Martin Luther King.
|
| 991 |
|
| 992 | * When was he born?
|
| 993 | - in 1901
|
| 994 | + in 1929
|
| 995 | - in 1968
|
| 996 |
|
| 997 | * When did he die?
|
| 998 | - in 1945
|
| 999 | - in 1515
|
| 1000 | + in 1968
|
| 1001 | - in 1999
|
| 1002 |
|
| 1003 | * Where was he born?
|
| 1004 | + Atlanta
|
| 1005 | - Memphis
|
| 1006 | - New York
|
| 1007 |
|
| 1008 | *) End of questions on Martin Luther King. </programlisting>
|
| 1009 |
|
| 1010 | <para>You can specify some options on groups, like:</para>
|
| 1011 |
|
| 1012 | <programlisting>*([shuffle=false,columns=2] Questions about Martin Luther King.</programlisting>
|
| 1013 |
|
| 1014 | <para>The following options are available:</para>
|
| 1015 |
|
| 1016 | <variablelist>
|
| 1017 | <varlistentry>
|
| 1018 | <term>shuffle=<replaceable>xxx</replaceable></term>
|
| 1019 |
|
| 1020 | <listitem>
|
| 1021 | <para>Give <replaceable>true</replaceable> or
|
| 1022 | <replaceable>false</replaceable> to tell if you want to shuffle
|
| 1023 | the questions inside the group. The default value if the global
|
| 1024 | one, from the <option>ShuffleQuestions</option> option.</para>
|
| 1025 | </listitem>
|
| 1026 | </varlistentry>
|
| 1027 |
|
| 1028 | <varlistentry>
|
| 1029 | <term>columns=<replaceable>n</replaceable></term>
|
| 1030 |
|
| 1031 | <listitem>
|
| 1032 | <para>Number of columns for the group's questions.</para>
|
| 1033 | </listitem>
|
| 1034 | </varlistentry>
|
| 1035 |
|
| 1036 | <varlistentry>
|
| 1037 | <term>group=<replaceable>nom</replaceable></term>
|
| 1038 |
|
| 1039 | <listitem>
|
| 1040 | <para>Give a name for the group (for internal matter).</para>
|
| 1041 | </listitem>
|
| 1042 | </varlistentry>
|
| 1043 |
|
| 1044 | <varlistentry>
|
| 1045 | <term>numquestions=<replaceable>n</replaceable></term>
|
| 1046 |
|
| 1047 | <listitem>
|
| 1048 | <para>With this option, only the first
|
| 1049 | <replaceable>n</replaceable> questions of the group will be used.
|
| 1050 | If the questions are shuffled, this allows to get
|
| 1051 | <replaceable>n</replaceable> questions chosen at random from the
|
| 1052 | group.</para>
|
| 1053 |
|
| 1054 | <note>
|
| 1055 | <para>Question with option <option>first</option> or
|
| 1056 | <option>last</option> are not affected (they are always
|
| 1057 | inserted). Moreover, questions stuck together with option
|
| 1058 | <option>next</option> count as one single question.</para>
|
| 1059 | </note>
|
| 1060 | </listitem>
|
| 1061 | </varlistentry>
|
| 1062 | </variablelist>
|
| 1063 | </sect2>
|
| 1064 |
|
| 1065 | <sect2 id="txt-arabic">
|
| 1066 | <title>Arabic language</title>
|
| 1067 |
|
| 1068 | <para>Writing a questionnaire in Arabic is a little special. Use of
|
| 1069 | course option</para>
|
| 1070 |
|
| 1071 | <programlisting>Lang: AR</programlisting>
|
| 1072 |
|
| 1073 | <para>You can also consider the following global options:</para>
|
| 1074 |
|
| 1075 | <variablelist>
|
| 1076 | <varlistentry>
|
| 1077 | <term>ArabicFont:</term>
|
| 1078 |
|
| 1079 | <listitem>
|
| 1080 | <para>This is the font used for Arabic text. Default value is
|
| 1081 | <emphasis>Rasheeq</emphasis>, a font from the project <ulink
|
| 1082 | url="http://arabeyes.org/">ArabEyes</ulink> (you can find it on
|
| 1083 | debian/ubuntu in the ttf-arabeyes package).</para>
|
| 1084 | </listitem>
|
| 1085 | </varlistentry>
|
| 1086 | </variablelist>
|
| 1087 |
|
| 1088 | <warning>
|
| 1089 | <para>For better working and portability, give an explicit value for
|
| 1090 | <option>L-Name</option> and <option>L-Student</option> options.</para>
|
| 1091 | </warning>
|
| 1092 |
|
| 1093 | <note>
|
| 1094 | <para>To insert texts with non-Arabic characters, you must turn on
|
| 1095 | <option>LaTeX</option> option and enclose these texts as a
|
| 1096 | <command>\textLR</command> LaTeX command argument, as in
|
| 1097 | <code>\textLR{xelatex command}</code>.</para>
|
| 1098 | </note>
|
| 1099 | </sect2>
|
| 1100 |
|
| 1101 | <sect2 id="txt-japanese">
|
| 1102 | <title>Japanese language</title>
|
| 1103 |
|
| 1104 | <para>Japanese language questionnaires can be produced with
|
| 1105 | option</para>
|
| 1106 |
|
| 1107 | <programlisting>Lang: JA</programlisting>
|
| 1108 |
|
| 1109 | <para>AMC will make some adjustments on the produced LaTeX source to
|
| 1110 | allow Japanese characters to be included.</para>
|
| 1111 |
|
| 1112 | <warning>
|
| 1113 | <para>In this case, AMC will use <command>pTex</command> to process
|
| 1114 | the LaTeX file made from your AMC-TXT source file. AMC needs a
|
| 1115 | <emphasis>recent</emphasis> version of <command>pTex</command> to
|
| 1116 | work. Versions of pTex from texlive 2009, that can be found on old
|
| 1117 | versions of some linux distributions, are <emphasis>not</emphasis>
|
| 1118 | compatible.</para>
|
| 1119 | </warning>
|
| 1120 | </sect2>
|
| 1121 |
|
| 1122 | <sect2>
|
| 1123 | <title>Including other files</title>
|
| 1124 |
|
| 1125 | <para>You can include other files with:</para>
|
| 1126 |
|
| 1127 | <programlisting>IncludeFile: <replaceable>file-to-include.txt</replaceable></programlisting>
|
| 1128 |
|
| 1129 | <warning>
|
| 1130 | <para>Be very careful when including a single file from different
|
| 1131 | projects! Suppose for example that
|
| 1132 | <filename>/home/alexis/questions-a.txt</filename> is included from
|
| 1133 | projects A and B. You already processed project A, and you are
|
| 1134 | currently working on project B. You update the scoring strategy of a
|
| 1135 | question in <filename>/home/alexis/questions-a.txt</filename>, and
|
| 1136 | also add another question. If you need to update the marks in project
|
| 1137 | A with this new scoring strategy, AMC will also see a new question for
|
| 1138 | which no data capture has been made, and this will spoil all your
|
| 1139 | marks in A...</para>
|
| 1140 | </warning>
|
| 1141 | </sect2>
|
| 1142 | </sect1>
|
| 1143 |
|
| 1144 | <sect1 id="latex">
|
| 1145 | <title>LaTeX source file</title>
|
| 1146 |
|
| 1147 | <para>This section describes the LaTeX commands that allows you to design
|
| 1148 | your exam answer sheets from a LaTeX source file. If you chose another
|
| 1149 | format for your source file, you can skip this section. The MCQ can be
|
| 1150 | described as a LaTeX file using the <package>automultiplechoice</package>
|
| 1151 | package. You can check the LaTeX file you are designing at any moment by
|
| 1152 | compiling it with the <command>latex</command> command, then visualizing
|
| 1153 | the resulting dvi file.</para>
|
| 1154 |
|
| 1155 | <para>We start with a few examples giving quick illustrations of how to
|
| 1156 | build LaTeX files for MCQs; the corresponding tex file are available as
|
| 1157 | templates, so that one can create a new MCQ project starting with one of
|
| 1158 | these templates.</para>
|
| 1159 |
|
| 1160 | <sect2>
|
| 1161 | <title>A simple example</title>
|
| 1162 |
|
| 1163 | <para> |
| 1164 | DESC: A simple example (from the documentation) with one simple question and one multiple question.--><programlisting
|
| 1165 | id="modeles-simple.tex" linenumbering="numbered">\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 1166 |
|
| 1167 | \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc} <co id="simple.latin1"
|
| 1168 | linkends="simple.latin1.exp"/>
|
| 1169 | \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
| 1170 |
|
| 1171 | \usepackage[box,completemulti]{automultiplechoice} <co id="simple.amc"
|
| 1172 | linkends="simple.amc.exp"/>
|
| 1173 | \begin{document}
|
| 1174 |
|
| 1175 | \onecopy{10}{ <co id="simple.exemplaire" linkends="simple.exemplaire.exp"/>
|
| 1176 |
|
| 1177 | %%% beginning of the test sheet header: <co id="simple.entete"
|
| 1178 | linkends="simple.entete.exp"/>
|
| 1179 |
|
| 1180 | \noindent{\bf QCM \hfill TEST}
|
| 1181 |
|
| 1182 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 1183 | \begin{minipage}{.4\linewidth}
|
| 1184 | \centering\large\bf Test\\ Examination on Jan., 1st, 2008\end{minipage}
|
| 1185 | \namefield{\fbox{ <co id="simple.champnom" linkends="simple.champnom.exp"/>
|
| 1186 | \begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 1187 | Firstname and lastname:
|
| 1188 |
|
| 1189 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 1190 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 1191 | \end{minipage}
|
| 1192 | }}
|
| 1193 |
|
| 1194 | \begin{center}\em
|
| 1195 | Duration : 10 minutes.
|
| 1196 |
|
| 1197 | No documents allowed. The use of electronic calculators is forbidden.
|
| 1198 |
|
| 1199 |
|
| 1200 | Questions using the sign \multiSymbole{} may have
|
| 1201 | zero, one or several correct answers. Other questions have a single correct answer.
|
| 1202 |
|
| 1203 | Negative points may be attributed to \emph{very
|
| 1204 | bad} answers.
|
| 1205 | \end{center}
|
| 1206 | \vspace{1ex}
|
| 1207 |
|
| 1208 | %%% end of the header
|
| 1209 |
|
| 1210 | \begin{question}{prez} <co id="simple.qr" linkends="simple.qr.exp"/>
|
| 1211 | Among the following persons, which one has ever been a President of the French Republic?
|
| 1212 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1213 | \correctchoice{René Coty}
|
| 1214 | \wrongchoice{Alain Prost}
|
| 1215 | \wrongchoice{Marcel Proust}
|
| 1216 | \wrongchoice{Claude Monet}
|
| 1217 | \end{choices}
|
| 1218 | \end{question}
|
| 1219 |
|
| 1220 | \begin{questionmult}{pref} <co id="simple.qrmult"
|
| 1221 | linkends="simple.qrmult.exp"/>
|
| 1222 | Among the following cities, which ones are French prefectures?
|
| 1223 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1224 | \correctchoice{Poitiers}
|
| 1225 | \wrongchoice{Sainte-Menehould}
|
| 1226 | \correctchoice{Avignon}
|
| 1227 | \end{choices}
|
| 1228 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 1229 |
|
| 1230 | \clearpage <co id="simple.clear" linkends="simple.clear.exp"/>
|
| 1231 |
|
| 1232 | } <co id="simple.fin" linkends="simple.fin.exp"/>
|
| 1233 |
|
| 1234 | \end{document}
|
| 1235 | </programlisting></para>
|
| 1236 |
|
| 1237 | <para>A few extra details on this example:</para>
|
| 1238 |
|
| 1239 | <para><calloutlist>
|
| 1240 | <callout arearefs="simple.latin1" id="simple.latin1.exp">
|
| 1241 | <para>The packages <package>inputenc</package> and
|
| 1242 | <package>fontenc</package> allow one to use the UTF-8 encoding.
|
| 1243 | You can of course modify them depending on the encoding you want
|
| 1244 | to use.</para>
|
| 1245 | </callout>
|
| 1246 |
|
| 1247 | <callout arearefs="simple.amc" id="simple.amc.exp">
|
| 1248 | <para>The options used here for the <package>automultiplechoice
|
| 1249 | </package>LaTeX package prevent questions from being split between
|
| 1250 | two pages (<option>box</option>) and to automatically complete any
|
| 1251 | multiple choice question by a standard answer allowing the student
|
| 1252 | to mention that, in her/his opinion, none of the listed answers is
|
| 1253 | correct (<option>completemulti</option>).</para>
|
| 1254 | </callout>
|
| 1255 |
|
| 1256 | <callout arearefs="simple.exemplaire" id="simple.exemplaire.exp">
|
| 1257 | <para>The <command>onecopy</command> command produces as many
|
| 1258 | (distinct) realizations of the MCQ test as desired (here 10).
|
| 1259 | See <xref linkend="sec.unecopie"/> for an alternative syntax using
|
| 1260 | an environment.</para>
|
| 1261 | </callout>
|
| 1262 |
|
| 1263 | <callout arearefs="simple.entete" id="simple.entete.exp">
|
| 1264 | <para>Lines that start here describe the header of the
|
| 1265 | test-sheet.</para>
|
| 1266 | </callout>
|
| 1267 |
|
| 1268 | <callout arearefs="simple.champnom" id="simple.champnom.exp">
|
| 1269 | <para>The <command>namefield</command> command specifies where
|
| 1270 | students write their name.</para>
|
| 1271 | </callout>
|
| 1272 |
|
| 1273 | <callout arearefs="simple.qr" id="simple.qr.exp">
|
| 1274 | <para>The environments <command>question</command> and
|
| 1275 | <command>choices</command> allow one to build a multiple choice
|
| 1276 | question for which there is a single correct answer. A unique
|
| 1277 | identifier for the question has to be specified (here:
|
| 1278 | <emphasis>prez</emphasis>).</para>
|
| 1279 | </callout>
|
| 1280 |
|
| 1281 | <callout arearefs="simple.qrmult" id="simple.qrmult.exp">
|
| 1282 | <para>The environments <command>questionmult</command> and
|
| 1283 | <command>choices</command> allow one to build a multiple choice
|
| 1284 | question that may have zero, one or several correct answers.
|
| 1285 | Student are asked to check all the boxes corresponding to an
|
| 1286 | answer that she/he thinks is correct, or the last box (added
|
| 1287 | automatically thanks to the <option>completemulti</option> option
|
| 1288 | used in the reference to the package in line 6).</para>
|
| 1289 | </callout>
|
| 1290 |
|
| 1291 | <callout arearefs="simple.clear" id="simple.clear.exp">
|
| 1292 | <para>The <command>clearpage</command> is used to start the next
|
| 1293 | realization of the MCQ test on a new page.</para>
|
| 1294 | </callout>
|
| 1295 |
|
| 1296 | <callout arearefs="simple.fin" id="simple.fin.exp">
|
| 1297 | <para>This marks the end of the <command>onecopy</command> command
|
| 1298 | (started at line 9).</para>
|
| 1299 | </callout>
|
| 1300 | </calloutlist></para>
|
| 1301 | </sect2>
|
| 1302 |
|
| 1303 | <sect2>
|
| 1304 | <title>An example with groups of questions and shuffling</title>
|
| 1305 |
|
| 1306 | <para>In this example, we want the order in which questions appear in
|
| 1307 | the MCQ test to be different from one realization of the test to the
|
| 1308 | other, but still keeping together questions dealing with the same
|
| 1309 | subject. To this end, we create two groups of questions, within which
|
| 1310 | questions are shuffled at random.</para>
|
| 1311 |
|
| 1312 | <para> |
| 1313 | DESC: An example (from the documentation) in which questions are shuffled inside two distinct groups.--><programlisting
|
| 1314 | id="modeles-groups.tex" linenumbering="numbered">\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 1315 |
|
| 1316 | \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
|
| 1317 | \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
| 1318 |
|
| 1319 | \usepackage[box,completemulti]{automultiplechoice}
|
| 1320 | \begin{document}
|
| 1321 |
|
| 1322 | %%% preparation of the groups
|
| 1323 |
|
| 1324 | \setdefaultgroupmode{withoutreplacement}
|
| 1325 |
|
| 1326 | \element{geographie}{
|
| 1327 | \begin{question}{Paris}
|
| 1328 | In which continent is Paris?
|
| 1329 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1330 | \correctchoice{Europe}
|
| 1331 | \wrongchoice{Africa}
|
| 1332 | \wrongchoice{Asia}
|
| 1333 | \wrongchoice{planet Mars}
|
| 1334 | \end{choices}
|
| 1335 | \end{question}
|
| 1336 | }
|
| 1337 |
|
| 1338 | \element{geographie}{
|
| 1339 | \begin{question}{Cameroon}
|
| 1340 | Which is the capital city of Cameroon?
|
| 1341 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1342 | \correctchoice{Yaoundé}
|
| 1343 | \wrongchoice{Douala}
|
| 1344 | \wrongchoice{Abou-Dabi}
|
| 1345 | \end{choices}
|
| 1346 | \end{question}
|
| 1347 | }
|
| 1348 |
|
| 1349 | \element{histoire}{
|
| 1350 | \begin{question}{Marignan}
|
| 1351 | In which year did the battle of Marignan take place?
|
| 1352 | \begin{choiceshoriz}
|
| 1353 | \correctchoice{1515}
|
| 1354 | \wrongchoice{1915}
|
| 1355 | \wrongchoice{1519}
|
| 1356 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 1357 | \end{question}
|
| 1358 | }
|
| 1359 |
|
| 1360 | \element{histoire}{
|
| 1361 | \begin{questionmult}{Nantes}
|
| 1362 | What can be said about the \emph{Édit de Nantes}?
|
| 1363 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1364 | \correctchoice{It was signed in 1598}
|
| 1365 | \correctchoice{Il has been revoked by Louis XIV}
|
| 1366 | \wrongchoice{It was signed by Henri II}
|
| 1367 | \end{choices}
|
| 1368 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 1369 | }
|
| 1370 |
|
| 1371 | %%% copies
|
| 1372 |
|
| 1373 | \onecopy{10}{
|
| 1374 |
|
| 1375 | %%% beginning of the test sheet header:
|
| 1376 |
|
| 1377 | \noindent{\bf QCM \hfill TEST}
|
| 1378 |
|
| 1379 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 1380 | \begin{minipage}{.4\linewidth}
|
| 1381 | \centering\large\bf History and geography\\ Examination on Jan. 1st, 2008
|
| 1382 | \end{minipage}
|
| 1383 | \namefield{\fbox{\begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 1384 | Firstname and lastname:
|
| 1385 |
|
| 1386 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 1387 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 1388 | \end{minipage}}}
|
| 1389 |
|
| 1390 | %%% end of the header
|
| 1391 |
|
| 1392 | \begin{center}
|
| 1393 | \hrule\vspace{2mm}
|
| 1394 | \bf\Large Geography
|
| 1395 | \vspace{1mm}\hrule
|
| 1396 | \end{center}
|
| 1397 |
|
| 1398 | \insertgroup{geographie}
|
| 1399 |
|
| 1400 | \begin{center}
|
| 1401 | \hrule\vspace{2mm}
|
| 1402 | \bf\Large History
|
| 1403 | \vspace{2mm}\hrule
|
| 1404 | \end{center}
|
| 1405 |
|
| 1406 | \insertgroup{histoire}
|
| 1407 |
|
| 1408 | \clearpage
|
| 1409 |
|
| 1410 | }
|
| 1411 |
|
| 1412 | \end{document}
|
| 1413 | </programlisting></para>
|
| 1414 | </sect2>
|
| 1415 |
|
| 1416 | <sect2 id="secensemble">
|
| 1417 | <title>An example with a separate answer sheet</title>
|
| 1418 |
|
| 1419 | <para>In this example, one wants the check-boxes to be put together in a
|
| 1420 | separate sheet. This makes cheating more difficult, and, more
|
| 1421 | importantly, it is enough to scan a single sheet per student, which
|
| 1422 | makes things easier if one has to do a manual scan. In this example, the
|
| 1423 | number of questions is limited: they fit into a single page, so that
|
| 1424 | such a layout would not be really useful in this particular case. It is
|
| 1425 | up to you to modify this example in order to use this layout with a
|
| 1426 | large number of questions!</para>
|
| 1427 |
|
| 1428 | <para> |
| 1429 | DESC: An example (from the documentation) where all check-boxes are put together on a separate sheet for each student.--><programlisting
|
| 1430 | id="modeles-separate.tex" linenumbering="numbered">\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 1431 |
|
| 1432 | \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
|
| 1433 | \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
| 1434 |
|
| 1435 | \usepackage[box,completemulti,separateanswersheet]{automultiplechoice} <co
|
| 1436 | id="ensemble.opt" linkends="ensemble.opt.exp"/>
|
| 1437 | \begin{document}
|
| 1438 |
|
| 1439 | \AMCrandomseed{1237893}
|
| 1440 |
|
| 1441 | \def\AMCformQuestion#1{\vspace{\AMCformVSpace}\par {\sc Question #1:} } <co
|
| 1442 | id="ensemble.fq" linkends="ensemble.fq.exp"/>
|
| 1443 |
|
| 1444 | \setdefaultgroupmode{withoutreplacement}
|
| 1445 |
|
| 1446 | \element{general}{
|
| 1447 | \begin{question}{prez}
|
| 1448 | Among the following persons, which one has ever been a President of the French Republic?
|
| 1449 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1450 | \correctchoice{René Coty}
|
| 1451 | \wrongchoice{Alain Prost}
|
| 1452 | \wrongchoice{Marcel Proust}
|
| 1453 | \wrongchoice{Claude Monet}
|
| 1454 | \end{choices}
|
| 1455 | \end{question}
|
| 1456 | }
|
| 1457 |
|
| 1458 | \element{general}{
|
| 1459 | \begin{questionmult}{pref}
|
| 1460 | Among the following cities, which ones are French prefectures?
|
| 1461 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1462 | \correctchoice{Poitiers}
|
| 1463 | \wrongchoice{Sainte-Menehould}
|
| 1464 | \correctchoice{Avignon}
|
| 1465 | \end{choices}
|
| 1466 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 1467 | }
|
| 1468 |
|
| 1469 | \element{general}{
|
| 1470 | \begin{question}{nb-ue}
|
| 1471 | How many different states were members of the European Union in Jan. 2009?
|
| 1472 | \begin{choiceshoriz}[o]
|
| 1473 | \wrongchoice{15}
|
| 1474 | \wrongchoice{21}
|
| 1475 | \wrongchoice{25}
|
| 1476 | \correctchoice{27}
|
| 1477 | \wrongchoice{31}
|
| 1478 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 1479 | \end{question}
|
| 1480 | }
|
| 1481 |
|
| 1482 | \onecopy{5}{
|
| 1483 |
|
| 1484 | %%% beginning of the test sheet header:
|
| 1485 |
|
| 1486 | \noindent{\bf QCM \hfill TEST}
|
| 1487 |
|
| 1488 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 1489 | \begin{minipage}{.4\linewidth}
|
| 1490 | \centering\large\bf Test\\ Examination on Jan. 1st, 2008
|
| 1491 | \end{minipage}
|
| 1492 |
|
| 1493 | \begin{center}\em
|
| 1494 | Durée : 10 minutes.
|
| 1495 |
|
| 1496 | No documents allowed. The use of electronic calculators is forbidden.
|
| 1497 |
|
| 1498 | Questions using the sign \multiSymbole{} may have
|
| 1499 | zero, one or several correct answers. Other questions have a single correct answer.
|
| 1500 |
|
| 1501 | Negative points may be attributed to \emph{very
|
| 1502 | bad} answers.
|
| 1503 |
|
| 1504 | \end{center}
|
| 1505 | \vspace{1ex}
|
| 1506 |
|
| 1507 | %%% end of the header
|
| 1508 |
|
| 1509 | \insertgroup{general}
|
| 1510 |
|
| 1511 | \AMCcleardoublepage <co id="ensemble.cp" linkends="ensemble.cp.exp"/>
|
| 1512 |
|
| 1513 | \AMCformBegin <co id="debut.form" linkends="debut.form.exp"/>
|
| 1514 |
|
| 1515 | %%% beginning of the answer sheet header
|
| 1516 |
|
| 1517 | {\large\bf Answer sheet:}
|
| 1518 | \hfill \namefield{\fbox{ <co id="ensemble.nom" linkends="ensemble.nom.exp"/>
|
| 1519 | \begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 1520 | Firstname and lastname:
|
| 1521 |
|
| 1522 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 1523 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 1524 | \end{minipage}
|
| 1525 | }}
|
| 1526 |
|
| 1527 | \begin{center}
|
| 1528 | \bf\em Answers must be given exclusively on this sheet:
|
| 1529 | answers given on the other sheets will be ignored.
|
| 1530 | \end{center}
|
| 1531 |
|
| 1532 | %%% end of the answer sheet header
|
| 1533 |
|
| 1534 | \AMCform <co id="ensemble.formulaire" linkends="ensemble.formulaire.exp"/>
|
| 1535 |
|
| 1536 | \clearpage
|
| 1537 |
|
| 1538 | }
|
| 1539 |
|
| 1540 | \end{document}</programlisting>The following remarks should make the above
|
| 1541 | example clearer :<calloutlist>
|
| 1542 | <callout arearefs="ensemble.opt" id="ensemble.opt.exp">
|
| 1543 | <para>The <option>separateanswersheet</option> option is what
|
| 1544 | allows us to do what we wanted.</para>
|
| 1545 | </callout>
|
| 1546 |
|
| 1547 | <callout arearefs="ensemble.fq" id="ensemble.fq.exp">
|
| 1548 | <para>One can re-define in this manner the way the questions are
|
| 1549 | identified on the answer sheet (this line is optional).</para>
|
| 1550 | </callout>
|
| 1551 |
|
| 1552 | <callout arearefs="ensemble.cp" id="ensemble.cp.exp">
|
| 1553 | <para>This page break is put before the special page where the
|
| 1554 | check-boxes are put together. If one does recto-verso printing, it
|
| 1555 | is preferable to use <command>\AMCcleardoublepage</command> so
|
| 1556 | that this page is printed apart from the others. In the case of
|
| 1557 | recto printing, one can simply use
|
| 1558 | <command>\clearpage</command>.</para>
|
| 1559 | </callout>
|
| 1560 |
|
| 1561 | <callout arearefs="debut.form" id="debut.form.exp">
|
| 1562 | <para>This command marks the beginning of the answer sheet part.
|
| 1563 | Its use is necessary for the appropriate treatment of the
|
| 1564 | questions which appear only in that part, e.g. those generated by
|
| 1565 | <command>AMCcode</command>.</para>
|
| 1566 | </callout>
|
| 1567 |
|
| 1568 | <callout arearefs="ensemble.nom" id="ensemble.nom.exp">
|
| 1569 | <para>Students should normally write their name on the answer
|
| 1570 | sheet!</para>
|
| 1571 | </callout>
|
| 1572 |
|
| 1573 | <callout arearefs="ensemble.formulaire" id="ensemble.formulaire.exp">
|
| 1574 | <para>The LaTeX command <command>AMCform</command> writes all the
|
| 1575 | check-boxes.</para>
|
| 1576 | </callout>
|
| 1577 | </calloutlist></para>
|
| 1578 |
|
| 1579 | <warning>
|
| 1580 | <para>When one uses a separate answer sheet, letters (or digits, if
|
| 1581 | one uses the option <option>digits</option>, see <xref
|
| 1582 | linkend="sec.package.options"/>) are written in the check-boxes. To
|
| 1583 | achieve a correct detection of the checked boxes, one has to ask
|
| 1584 | students to completely fill the relevant boxes (checking by simply
|
| 1585 | drawing a cross would not suffice). One also has to tune the gray
|
| 1586 | level threshold (defining the proportion of black dots in a box above
|
| 1587 | which that box is considered to be checked) to a value of order
|
| 1588 | 0.5.</para>
|
| 1589 | </warning>
|
| 1590 | </sect2>
|
| 1591 |
|
| 1592 | <sect2>
|
| 1593 | <title>Description of the LaTeX commands</title>
|
| 1594 |
|
| 1595 | <sect3 id="sec.package.options">
|
| 1596 | <title id="sec.package.options.title">Package options</title>
|
| 1597 |
|
| 1598 | <para>To use the <package>automultiplechoice</package> package, one
|
| 1599 | uses the line <programlisting>\usepackage[...]{automultiplechoice}</programlisting>where
|
| 1600 | the dots are replaced by a list of options separated by commas. Here
|
| 1601 | are the available options:</para>
|
| 1602 |
|
| 1603 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 1604 | <listitem>
|
| 1605 | <para><option>lang=<replaceable>XX</replaceable></option>: sets
|
| 1606 | the subject language to <replaceable>XX</replaceable>. At present,
|
| 1607 | only DE (German), ES (Spanish), FR (French), IT (Italian), JA
|
| 1608 | (Japanese) and NL (Dutch) are available. Several strings added by
|
| 1609 | <package>automultiplechoice</package> will be translated, such as
|
| 1610 | "None of these answers are correct", see option
|
| 1611 | <option>completemulti</option>.</para>
|
| 1612 | </listitem>
|
| 1613 |
|
| 1614 | <listitem>
|
| 1615 | <para><option>box</option>: puts every question in a block, so
|
| 1616 | that it cannot be split by a page break.</para>
|
| 1617 |
|
| 1618 | <note>
|
| 1619 | <para>You may occasionally cancel this option for each question
|
| 1620 | with the command <command>\AMCnobloc</command>. <programlisting>
|
| 1621 | {\AMCnobloc%
|
| 1622 | \begin{question}{nb-ue}
|
| 1623 | How many different states were members of the European Union in Jan. 2009?
|
| 1624 | \begin{choiceshoriz}[o]
|
| 1625 | \wrongchoice{15}
|
| 1626 | \wrongchoice{21}
|
| 1627 | \wrongchoice{25}
|
| 1628 | \correctchoice{27}
|
| 1629 | \wrongchoice{31}
|
| 1630 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 1631 | \end{question}
|
| 1632 | }% </programlisting></para>
|
| 1633 | </note>
|
| 1634 | </listitem>
|
| 1635 |
|
| 1636 | <listitem>
|
| 1637 | <para><option>completemulti</option>: automatically adds a "None
|
| 1638 | of these answers are correct" choice at the end of each multiple
|
| 1639 | question. Thus, for these questions, a distinction can be made
|
| 1640 | between no answer and the answer consisting in treating none of
|
| 1641 | the listed answers as correct. This behavior can be forced or
|
| 1642 | canceled for a particular question using one of the commands
|
| 1643 | <command>\AMCcompleteMulti</command> or
|
| 1644 | <command>\AMCnoCompleteMulti</command> inside the corresponding
|
| 1645 | <command>questionmult</command> environment.</para>
|
| 1646 | </listitem>
|
| 1647 |
|
| 1648 | <listitem>
|
| 1649 | <para><option>noshuffle</option>: stops the automatic shuffling of
|
| 1650 | the answers for every question</para>
|
| 1651 | </listitem>
|
| 1652 |
|
| 1653 | <listitem>
|
| 1654 | <para><option>answers</option>: produces the corrected version of
|
| 1655 | the MCQ test, not the test sheet itself.</para>
|
| 1656 | </listitem>
|
| 1657 |
|
| 1658 | <listitem>
|
| 1659 | <para><option>indivanswers</option> : produces the corrected
|
| 1660 | version of each MCQ test. So useful with randomized
|
| 1661 | numbers.</para>
|
| 1662 | </listitem>
|
| 1663 |
|
| 1664 | <listitem>
|
| 1665 | <para><option>separateanswersheet</option>: requires that all
|
| 1666 | check-boxes be put together at the end of the test sheet (usually,
|
| 1667 | this option is used when one wants to have only one sheet to scan
|
| 1668 | per student - see the example in <xref
|
| 1669 | linkend="secensemble"/>).</para>
|
| 1670 | </listitem>
|
| 1671 |
|
| 1672 | <listitem>
|
| 1673 | <para><option>digits</option>: if one uses the
|
| 1674 | <option>separateanswersheet</option> option, the
|
| 1675 | <option>digits</option> option requires the question to be
|
| 1676 | identified with digits rather than with letters (which corresponds
|
| 1677 | to the default setting). With this option, one has to take care
|
| 1678 | that the number of answers does not exceed 9.</para>
|
| 1679 | </listitem>
|
| 1680 |
|
| 1681 | <listitem>
|
| 1682 | <para><option>outsidebox</option>: when using
|
| 1683 | <option>separateanswersheet</option>, this option asks to print
|
| 1684 | letters (or digits) outside the boxes on the answer sheet.</para>
|
| 1685 | </listitem>
|
| 1686 |
|
| 1687 | <listitem>
|
| 1688 | <para><option>insidebox</option>: when not using
|
| 1689 | <option>separateanswersheet</option>, this options asks to print
|
| 1690 | letters (or digits) inside the boxes to be filled by the
|
| 1691 | students.</para>
|
| 1692 | </listitem>
|
| 1693 |
|
| 1694 | <listitem>
|
| 1695 | <para><option>catalog</option>: use this option to make a catalog
|
| 1696 | of your questions to be used to compose future exams. No need to
|
| 1697 | use <command>\onecopy</command> with this layout.</para>
|
| 1698 | </listitem>
|
| 1699 |
|
| 1700 | <listitem>
|
| 1701 | <para><option>postcorrect</option>: use this option if you want to
|
| 1702 | give the correct answers after scans analysis, from a teacher
|
| 1703 | completed answer sheet - see <xref linkend="postcorrect"/> for
|
| 1704 | details.</para>
|
| 1705 | </listitem>
|
| 1706 |
|
| 1707 | <listitem>
|
| 1708 | <para><option>automarks</option>: in
|
| 1709 | <option>separateanswersheet</option> mode, use this option if you
|
| 1710 | want to cancel marks printing on the subject pages. They will only
|
| 1711 | be print on the answer sheet pages. To change the way pages
|
| 1712 | numbers are print on the subject pages, redefine the
|
| 1713 | <command>\AMCsubjectPageTag</command> command:</para>
|
| 1714 |
|
| 1715 | <programlisting>\renewcommand\AMCsubjectPageTag{%
|
| 1716 | \fbox{\texttt{\the\AMCid@etud:\thepage}}%
|
| 1717 | }</programlisting>
|
| 1718 |
|
| 1719 | <warning>
|
| 1720 | <para>Only use <option>automarks</option> option if no data are
|
| 1721 | to be collected on the subjects pages, as AMC won't be able to
|
| 1722 | process these pages.</para>
|
| 1723 | </warning>
|
| 1724 | </listitem>
|
| 1725 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 1726 | </sect3>
|
| 1727 |
|
| 1728 | <sect3 id="sec.unecopie">
|
| 1729 | <title>Description of a copy</title>
|
| 1730 |
|
| 1731 | <para>The LaTeX source code describing the content of the test sheet
|
| 1732 | has to be included in a call to the command
|
| 1733 | <command>\onecopy</command>, the first argument being the number of
|
| 1734 | distinct realizations to be produced, and the second argument being
|
| 1735 | the code used to generate a realization.</para>
|
| 1736 |
|
| 1737 | <programlisting>\onecopy{50}{ ... }</programlisting>
|
| 1738 |
|
| 1739 | <para>If you have downloaded the LaTeX package
|
| 1740 | <package>environ</package> <emphasis>before</emphasis>
|
| 1741 | <package>automultiplechoice</package>, an alternative syntax is
|
| 1742 | available, using the <command>examcopy</command> environment, where
|
| 1743 | the number of realizations is an option (default is 5).</para>
|
| 1744 |
|
| 1745 | <programlisting>\begin{examcopy}[50]
|
| 1746 | ...
|
| 1747 | \end{examcopy}</programlisting>
|
| 1748 |
|
| 1749 | <note>
|
| 1750 | <para>The <package>environ</package> package is not available in the
|
| 1751 | TeX Live 2007 distribution, which is still used in Ubuntu
|
| 1752 | distributions up to version 9.10 (Karmic Koala).</para>
|
| 1753 | </note>
|
| 1754 | </sect3>
|
| 1755 |
|
| 1756 | <sect3 id="latex.qr">
|
| 1757 | <title id="latex.qr.title">Questions and answers</title>
|
| 1758 |
|
| 1759 | <para>For simple questions (a single correct answer), one uses the
|
| 1760 | following model: <programlisting linenumbering="unnumbered">\begin{question}{identifier}
|
| 1761 | Here is the question...
|
| 1762 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1763 | \correctchoice{The correct answer}
|
| 1764 | \wrongchoice{A wrong answer}
|
| 1765 | \wrongchoice{Another wrong answer}
|
| 1766 | \end{choices}
|
| 1767 | \end{question}</programlisting></para>
|
| 1768 |
|
| 1769 | <important>
|
| 1770 | <para>One must use a different identifier for every question. An
|
| 1771 | identifier can be made of digits, letters, and simple characters
|
| 1772 | (but do not use e.g. underscores, braces or brackets, that have a
|
| 1773 | special meaning in LaTeX files). Don't end your question identifier
|
| 1774 | with a dot followed by digits, as this syntax is reserved to codes
|
| 1775 | input.</para>
|
| 1776 | </important>
|
| 1777 |
|
| 1778 | <note>
|
| 1779 | <para>The maximum number of answers for a given question is limited
|
| 1780 | to 199.</para>
|
| 1781 | </note>
|
| 1782 |
|
| 1783 | <para>To keep the original order of the answers and prevent shuffling
|
| 1784 | for this specific question, one can use the <option>o</option> option
|
| 1785 | of the <option>choices</option> environment, replacing line 3 by the
|
| 1786 | following:<programlisting>\begin{choices}[o]</programlisting></para>
|
| 1787 |
|
| 1788 | <para>To put the answers on two columns, one can use the
|
| 1789 | <package>multicol</package> package: load it in the preamble (just
|
| 1790 | after the reference to the package
|
| 1791 | <package>automultiplechoice</package> for instance) with
|
| 1792 | <programlisting>\usepackage{multicol}</programlisting>and include the
|
| 1793 | choices environment inside a multicols environment in the following
|
| 1794 | manner:<programlisting> \begin{multicols}{2}
|
| 1795 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1796 | \correctchoice{The correct answer}
|
| 1797 | \wrongchoice{A wrong answer}
|
| 1798 | \wrongchoice{Another wrong answer}
|
| 1799 | \end{choices}
|
| 1800 | \end{multicols}</programlisting></para>
|
| 1801 |
|
| 1802 | <para>For even shorter answers, one can require questions to be
|
| 1803 | printed following one another, using the <option>choiceshoriz</option>
|
| 1804 | environment instead of <option>choices</option>.</para>
|
| 1805 |
|
| 1806 | <para>Multiple questions (those for which no, one, or several answers
|
| 1807 | can be correct) use the <option>questionmult</option> environment
|
| 1808 | instead of <option>question</option>.</para>
|
| 1809 |
|
| 1810 | <para>When the answer to the question is not supposed to be taken into
|
| 1811 | account in the grading, one uses the <code>\QuestionIndicative</code>
|
| 1812 | command, as in the following example:</para>
|
| 1813 |
|
| 1814 | <para>
|
| 1815 | <programlisting>\begin{question}{difficulty}\QuestionIndicative
|
| 1816 | \scoring{auto=0,v=-1,e=-2}
|
| 1817 | Did you find this class easy or difficult? Please answer on a scale from 0 (very difficult) to 5
|
| 1818 | (very easy).
|
| 1819 | \begin{choiceshoriz}[o]
|
| 1820 | \correctchoice{0}
|
| 1821 | \correctchoice{1}
|
| 1822 | \correctchoice{2}
|
| 1823 | \correctchoice{3}
|
| 1824 | \correctchoice{4}
|
| 1825 | \correctchoice{5}
|
| 1826 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 1827 | \end{question}</programlisting>
|
| 1828 | </para>
|
| 1829 | </sect3>
|
| 1830 |
|
| 1831 | <sect3 id="latex.explain">
|
| 1832 | <title id="latex.explain.title">Explanation for the answers of a
|
| 1833 | question</title>
|
| 1834 |
|
| 1835 | <para>To provide explanation for the answers of a question, one can
|
| 1836 | use the <command>\explain</command> command. The explanations are
|
| 1837 | optional and are only displayed in the Solution and Catalog
|
| 1838 | file.</para>
|
| 1839 |
|
| 1840 | <para>Here is a simple example:</para>
|
| 1841 |
|
| 1842 | <para>
|
| 1843 | <programlisting>
|
| 1844 | \begin{question}{explanation}
|
| 1845 | Which has the highest elevation among the following?
|
| 1846 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1847 | \correctchoice{Sagarmatha}
|
| 1848 | \wrongchoice{K2}
|
| 1849 | \wrongchoice{Mont Blanc}
|
| 1850 | \wrongchoice{Aconcagua}
|
| 1851 | \end{choices}
|
| 1852 | \explain{Sagarmatha which literally means `Head of sky' is the native name of
|
| 1853 | Mount Everest, the highest mountain in the world.}
|
| 1854 | \end{question}</programlisting>
|
| 1855 | </para>
|
| 1856 |
|
| 1857 | <note>
|
| 1858 | <para>The <command>explain</command> command can be used inside
|
| 1859 | <option>question</option> like environments only. This includes
|
| 1860 | <option>question</option>, <option>questionmult</option> and
|
| 1861 | <option>questionmultx</option> environments.</para>
|
| 1862 | </note>
|
| 1863 |
|
| 1864 | <para>By default this command prints <emphasis>Explanation:
|
| 1865 | </emphasis> before each explanations. This behavior can be changed
|
| 1866 | using the <command>\AMCtext</command> command (see section <xref
|
| 1867 | linkend="AMCtext"/>).</para>
|
| 1868 |
|
| 1869 | <para>If you want to change this default behavior only for some
|
| 1870 | questions and not for all just use the <command>\AMCtext</command>
|
| 1871 | command before the <command>\explain</command> command as in the
|
| 1872 | following example:</para>
|
| 1873 |
|
| 1874 | <para>
|
| 1875 | <programlisting>
|
| 1876 | \begin{question}{elevation}
|
| 1877 | Which has the highest elevation among the following?
|
| 1878 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1879 | \correctchoice{Sagarmatha}
|
| 1880 | \wrongchoice{K2}
|
| 1881 | \wrongchoice{Mont Blanc}
|
| 1882 | \wrongchoice{Aconcagua}
|
| 1883 | \end{choices}
|
| 1884 | \explain{Sagarmatha which literally means `Head of sky' is the native name of
|
| 1885 | Mount Everest, the highest mountain in the world.}
|
| 1886 | \end{question}
|
| 1887 |
|
| 1888 | \begin{question}{odd}
|
| 1889 | Pick the odd one out.
|
| 1890 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1891 | \correctchoice{Kilimanjaro}
|
| 1892 | \wrongchoice{Himalayas}
|
| 1893 | \wrongchoice{Alps}
|
| 1894 | \wrongchoice{Andes}
|
| 1895 | \end{choices}
|
| 1896 | \AMCtext{explain}{\textit{\textbf{Reason: }}}
|
| 1897 | \explain{Kilimanjaro is a mountain while the rest are mountain ranges.}
|
| 1898 | \end{question}
|
| 1899 |
|
| 1900 | \begin{questionmultx}{himalaya}
|
| 1901 | Among the following which is in the Himalayas?
|
| 1902 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1903 | \correctchoice{Mount Everest}
|
| 1904 | \correctchoice{K2}
|
| 1905 | \wrongchoice{Mont Blanc}
|
| 1906 | \wrongchoice{Aconcagua}
|
| 1907 | \end{choices}
|
| 1908 | \explain{Aconcagua is located in the Andes mountain range while Mont Blanc
|
| 1909 | is located in the Alps.}
|
| 1910 | \end{questionmultx}</programlisting>
|
| 1911 | </para>
|
| 1912 |
|
| 1913 | <para>This will now print <emphasis>Explanation: </emphasis> before
|
| 1914 | the explanations of first and third question but <emphasis>Reason:
|
| 1915 | </emphasis> before the explanation of second question.</para>
|
| 1916 | </sect3>
|
| 1917 |
|
| 1918 | <sect3>
|
| 1919 | <title>Putting answers on multiple columns</title>
|
| 1920 |
|
| 1921 | <para>To put answers on several columns (and thus save space), one can
|
| 1922 | embed the <option>choices</option> environment in a
|
| 1923 | <option>multicols</option> environment, using the LaTeX package
|
| 1924 | <package>multicol</package>.</para>
|
| 1925 |
|
| 1926 | <para>If, moreover, the answers do not fit into a single line, an
|
| 1927 | answer might be split over several columns, which might be a little
|
| 1928 | puzzling for the reader. The <command>\AMCBoxedAnswers</command>
|
| 1929 | command was defined in order to prevent this phenomenon, by embedding
|
| 1930 | each answer into a box. Here is an example of use:</para>
|
| 1931 |
|
| 1932 | <para>
|
| 1933 | <programlisting>\begin{question}{two columns}
|
| 1934 | What is a bird ?
|
| 1935 | \begin{multicols}{2}\AMCBoxedAnswers
|
| 1936 | \begin{choices}
|
| 1937 | \correctchoice{It is an animal with wings, laying eggs. There are birds with all sorts of colors.}
|
| 1938 | \wrongchoice{It is a large piece of furniture, made of wood, and used most of the time to store
|
| 1939 | household linen}
|
| 1940 | \wrongchoice{It is a steam machine devised to seal cans at high speed.}
|
| 1941 | \end{choices}
|
| 1942 | \end{multicols}
|
| 1943 | \end{question}</programlisting>
|
| 1944 | </para>
|
| 1945 |
|
| 1946 | <para>Let us note that it is also possible to parameterize the
|
| 1947 | vertical space between two answer blocks, thanks to the dimension
|
| 1948 | <parameter>AMCinterBrep</parameter>:</para>
|
| 1949 |
|
| 1950 | <para>
|
| 1951 | <programlisting>\AMCinterBrep=.5ex</programlisting>
|
| 1952 | </para>
|
| 1953 | </sect3>
|
| 1954 |
|
| 1955 | <sect3>
|
| 1956 | <title>Space between answers</title>
|
| 1957 |
|
| 1958 | <para>Let us note that it is also possible to parameterize the
|
| 1959 | vertical space between many answer blocks, thanks to the dimension
|
| 1960 | <parameter>AMCinterIrep</parameter>:</para>
|
| 1961 |
|
| 1962 | <para>
|
| 1963 | <programlisting>\AMCinterIrep=.75ex</programlisting>
|
| 1964 | </para>
|
| 1965 | </sect3>
|
| 1966 |
|
| 1967 | <sect3 id="marks.display.area">
|
| 1968 | <title id="marks.display.area.title">Describe the marks' display
|
| 1969 | area</title>
|
| 1970 |
|
| 1971 | <para>You may add an additional option of marking area (see <xref
|
| 1972 | endterm="marks.position.title" linkend="marks.position"/>).</para>
|
| 1973 |
|
| 1974 | <sect4>
|
| 1975 | <title>Without the <option>separateanswersheet</option>
|
| 1976 | option</title>
|
| 1977 |
|
| 1978 | <para>Type this command after <command>\begin{document}</command>
|
| 1979 | and before the command <command>\onecopy</command> :</para>
|
| 1980 |
|
| 1981 | <programlisting>\AMCsetScoreZone{width=1.5em,height=1.5ex,depth=.5ex,position=margins}</programlisting>
|
| 1982 |
|
| 1983 | <para>The variables <parameter>width</parameter>,
|
| 1984 | <parameter>height</parameter>, <parameter>depth</parameter> describe
|
| 1985 | the dimensions of the box marking and its location on the
|
| 1986 | sheet.</para>
|
| 1987 |
|
| 1988 | <para>The <parameter>position</parameter> value may be equal to :
|
| 1989 | none, question, margin, margins.</para>
|
| 1990 | </sect4>
|
| 1991 |
|
| 1992 | <sect4>
|
| 1993 | <title>With the <option>separateanswersheet</option>option</title>
|
| 1994 |
|
| 1995 | <para>Type this command after <command>\begin{document}</command>
|
| 1996 | and before the command <command>\onecopy</command> :</para>
|
| 1997 |
|
| 1998 | <programlisting>\AMCsetScoreZoneAnswerSheet{width=1.5em,height=1.5ex,depth=.5ex,position=question}</programlisting>
|
| 1999 | </sect4>
|
| 2000 |
|
| 2001 | <para>The variables <parameter>width</parameter>,
|
| 2002 | <parameter>height</parameter>, <parameter>depth</parameter> describe
|
| 2003 | the dimensions of the box marking and its location on the
|
| 2004 | sheet.</para>
|
| 2005 |
|
| 2006 | <para>The <parameter>position</parameter> value may be equal to :
|
| 2007 | none, question, margin, margins.</para>
|
| 2008 |
|
| 2009 | <warning>
|
| 2010 | <para>Don't type one of those commands <emphasis> after</emphasis>
|
| 2011 | printing.</para>
|
| 2012 | </warning>
|
| 2013 | </sect3>
|
| 2014 |
|
| 2015 | <sect3>
|
| 2016 | <title>Groups of questions</title>
|
| 2017 |
|
| 2018 | <para>Putting questions into groups allows one to shuffle questions
|
| 2019 | inside these groups, in a different way for each realization of the
|
| 2020 | test. Every group of questions must have a name formed solely with
|
| 2021 | plain letters.</para>
|
| 2022 |
|
| 2023 | <para>One can put questions in a group one by one, as in the following
|
| 2024 | example.</para>
|
| 2025 |
|
| 2026 | <para>
|
| 2027 | <programlisting>\element{mygroup}{
|
| 2028 | \begin{question}{easy}
|
| 2029 | So, how much is one plus one?
|
| 2030 | \begin{choiceshoriz}
|
| 2031 | \correctchoice{two}
|
| 2032 | \wrongchoice{zero}
|
| 2033 | \wrongchoice{three}
|
| 2034 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 2035 | \end{question}
|
| 2036 | }</programlisting>
|
| 2037 | </para>
|
| 2038 |
|
| 2039 | <important>
|
| 2040 | <para>The formation of the group, using the
|
| 2041 | <command>element</command> commands, must be made only once: thus,
|
| 2042 | these commands have to be used <emphasis>before</emphasis> the
|
| 2043 | <command>onecopy</command> command, which repeats some actions for
|
| 2044 | every realization.</para>
|
| 2045 | </important>
|
| 2046 |
|
| 2047 | <para>Finally, the group content can be output to the test sheet using
|
| 2048 | command <command>insertgroup</command>, as in<programlisting>\insertgroup{mygroup}</programlisting></para>
|
| 2049 |
|
| 2050 | <para>Group insertion can be controlled by the group mode, that can be
|
| 2051 | set by the <command>setgroupmode</command> command (called after group
|
| 2052 | creation, once for all, before <command>onecopy</command>):</para>
|
| 2053 |
|
| 2054 | <programlisting>\setgroupmode{mygroup}{XXX}</programlisting>
|
| 2055 |
|
| 2056 | <para>where <code>XXX</code> can be one of the following:</para>
|
| 2057 |
|
| 2058 | <variablelist>
|
| 2059 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2060 | <term>fixed</term>
|
| 2061 |
|
| 2062 | <listitem>
|
| 2063 | <para>with this mode, group's elements are taken from the
|
| 2064 | beginnig at each insertion.</para>
|
| 2065 | </listitem>
|
| 2066 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2067 |
|
| 2068 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2069 | <term>cyclic</term>
|
| 2070 |
|
| 2071 | <listitem>
|
| 2072 | <para>the elements will be taken from the group following the
|
| 2073 | last call group’s use, recycling if necessary.</para>
|
| 2074 | </listitem>
|
| 2075 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2076 |
|
| 2077 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2078 | <term>withreplacement</term>
|
| 2079 |
|
| 2080 | <listitem>
|
| 2081 | <para>the same as <code>fixed</code>, but the group is shuffled
|
| 2082 | before each use.</para>
|
| 2083 | </listitem>
|
| 2084 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2085 |
|
| 2086 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2087 | <term>withoutreplacement</term>
|
| 2088 |
|
| 2089 | <listitem>
|
| 2090 | <para>like <code>cyclic</code>, adding some shuffling when
|
| 2091 | comming back to the beginning of the group.</para>
|
| 2092 | </listitem>
|
| 2093 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2094 | </variablelist>
|
| 2095 |
|
| 2096 | <para>Note that a default group mode can be set for all groups that
|
| 2097 | will be created next (a group is created at the first
|
| 2098 | <command>element</command> call), using the command</para>
|
| 2099 |
|
| 2100 | <programlisting>\setdefaultgroupmode{XXX}</programlisting>
|
| 2101 |
|
| 2102 | <para>Without any mode definition, the <code>fixed</code> mode is
|
| 2103 | used.</para>
|
| 2104 |
|
| 2105 | <para>Once a group is formed, it is possible to shuffle questions
|
| 2106 | inside this group using the <command>shufflegroup</command> command.
|
| 2107 | For instance<programlisting>\shufflegroup{mygroup}</programlisting></para>
|
| 2108 |
|
| 2109 | <para>However, the command <command>shufflegroup</command> can always
|
| 2110 | be replaced by a proper use of group modes.</para>
|
| 2111 |
|
| 2112 | <warning>
|
| 2113 | <para>
|
| 2114 | Delete the command <command>\shufflegroup</command> if you rerun created tests with a AMC version lower to 1.2.2014.111201 and if you change the default mode (<code>fixed</code>).
|
| 2115 | </para>
|
| 2116 | </warning>
|
| 2117 |
|
| 2118 | <para>Groups of questions can be manipulated more precisely thanks to
|
| 2119 | the following commands:</para>
|
| 2120 |
|
| 2121 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 2122 | <listitem>
|
| 2123 | <para><code>\insertgroup[n]{mygroup}</code> (using optional
|
| 2124 | parameter <replaceable>n</replaceable>) only inserts the
|
| 2125 | <replaceable>n</replaceable> first elements from the group.</para>
|
| 2126 | </listitem>
|
| 2127 |
|
| 2128 | <listitem>
|
| 2129 | <para><code>\cleargroup{mygroup}</code> clears all group
|
| 2130 | content.</para>
|
| 2131 | </listitem>
|
| 2132 |
|
| 2133 | <listitem>
|
| 2134 | <para><code>\copygroup{groupA}{groupB}</code> copies all the
|
| 2135 | elements from group <replaceable>groupA</replaceable> to the end
|
| 2136 | of group <replaceable>groupB</replaceable>. With an optional
|
| 2137 | argument <replaceable>n</replaceable>, only the n first elements
|
| 2138 | will be copied: <code>\copygroup[n]{groupA}{groupB}</code>.</para>
|
| 2139 | </listitem>
|
| 2140 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 2141 |
|
| 2142 | <para>With these commands, you can for example make a exam taking 4
|
| 2143 | questions from group GA at random, 5 questions from group GB at
|
| 2144 | random, and all the questions from group GO, shuffling all these
|
| 2145 | questions, with the following code (to be used inside the argument of
|
| 2146 | the command <command>onecopy</command>, and supposing that the group
|
| 2147 | mode of groups <code>GA</code>, <code>GB</code> and <code>all</code>
|
| 2148 | is <code>withoutreplacement</code> or
|
| 2149 | <code>withreplacement</code>):</para>
|
| 2150 |
|
| 2151 | <programlisting>\cleargroup{all}
|
| 2152 | \copygroup[4]{GA}{all}
|
| 2153 | \copygroup[5]{GB}{all}
|
| 2154 | \copygroup{GO}{all}
|
| 2155 | \insertgroup{all}</programlisting>
|
| 2156 | </sect3>
|
| 2157 |
|
| 2158 | <sect3>
|
| 2159 | <title>Page size, margins</title>
|
| 2160 |
|
| 2161 | <para>The <command>automultiplechoice</command> LaTeX package uses
|
| 2162 | <command>geometry</command> to set the margins and page layout. You
|
| 2163 | can overwrite its settings using the <command>\geometry</command>
|
| 2164 | command just before the <code>\begin{document}</code> - see the
|
| 2165 | geometry package documentation for details. The values initially set
|
| 2166 | by AMC are:</para>
|
| 2167 |
|
| 2168 | <programlisting>\geometry{hmargin=3cm,headheight=2cm,headsep=.3cm,footskip=1cm,top=3.5cm,bottom=2.5cm}</programlisting>
|
| 2169 |
|
| 2170 | <para>When reducing the margins to gain some space, keep in mind
|
| 2171 | that:</para>
|
| 2172 |
|
| 2173 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 2174 | <listitem>
|
| 2175 | <para>The four corner marks must be printed entirely (they could
|
| 2176 | disappear due to the printer margins).</para>
|
| 2177 | </listitem>
|
| 2178 |
|
| 2179 | <listitem>
|
| 2180 | <para>The four corner marks must be entirely visible on the scans
|
| 2181 | (if they are too close from the border and the paper moved a
|
| 2182 | little or turned a little during scanning, this could not be the
|
| 2183 | case).</para>
|
| 2184 | </listitem>
|
| 2185 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 2186 |
|
| 2187 | <para>It is also possible to set the paper size as an option to add to
|
| 2188 | the list given as argument to the <command>\geometry</command>
|
| 2189 | command. Available values include <code>a4paper</code>,
|
| 2190 | <code>a5paper</code>, <code>a6paper</code>, <code>b4paper</code>,
|
| 2191 | <code>b5paper</code>, <code>ansibpaper</code>,
|
| 2192 | <code>ansicpaper</code>, <code>ansidpaper</code>,
|
| 2193 | <code>letterpaper</code>, <code>executivepaper</code>,
|
| 2194 | <code>legalpaper</code>.</para>
|
| 2195 |
|
| 2196 | <para>For small paper sizes, it may also be interesting to change the
|
| 2197 | position of the human readable sheet IDs (like <code>+1/1/53+</code>)
|
| 2198 | in the header. This can be done using the
|
| 2199 | <command>\AMCidsPosition</command> command, in the form</para>
|
| 2200 |
|
| 2201 | <programlisting>\AMCidsPosition{pos=<replaceable>p</replaceable>,width=<replaceable>w</replaceable>,height=<replaceable>h</replaceable>}</programlisting>
|
| 2202 |
|
| 2203 | <para>where <replaceable>p</replaceable> can be <code>none</code>,
|
| 2204 | <code>top</code> or <code>side</code>, and the dimensions
|
| 2205 | <replaceable>w</replaceable> and <replaceable>h</replaceable> refers
|
| 2206 | to the (invisible) box containing the ID. The default values
|
| 2207 | are</para>
|
| 2208 |
|
| 2209 | <programlisting>\AMCidsPosition{pos=side,width=4cm,height=3ex}</programlisting>
|
| 2210 |
|
| 2211 | <para>Let us end with an example for A5 paper sheets:</para>
|
| 2212 |
|
| 2213 | <programlisting>\geometry{a5paper,hmargin=1.6cm,top=2.5cm}
|
| 2214 | \AMCidsPosition{pos=top}</programlisting>
|
| 2215 | </sect3>
|
| 2216 |
|
| 2217 | <sect3>
|
| 2218 | <title>Check-box presentation style</title>
|
| 2219 |
|
| 2220 | <para>The <command>\AMCboxDimensions</command> command allows one to
|
| 2221 | modify one or several dimensions of the check-boxes.</para>
|
| 2222 |
|
| 2223 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 2224 | <listitem>
|
| 2225 | <para><option>shape</option> is the shape of the boxes. Use the
|
| 2226 | value <replaceable>square</replaceable> to get squares or
|
| 2227 | rectangles, and <replaceable>oval</replaceable> to get circles or
|
| 2228 | ovals. Note that the LaTeX package tikz must be loaded for
|
| 2229 | <replaceable>oval</replaceable> to work.</para>
|
| 2230 | </listitem>
|
| 2231 |
|
| 2232 | <listitem>
|
| 2233 | <para><option>width</option> is the width of the box;</para>
|
| 2234 | </listitem>
|
| 2235 |
|
| 2236 | <listitem>
|
| 2237 | <para><option>height</option> is the height of the box;</para>
|
| 2238 | </listitem>
|
| 2239 |
|
| 2240 | <listitem>
|
| 2241 | <para><option>size</option> is the size (<option>width</option>
|
| 2242 | and <option>height</option>) of the box;</para>
|
| 2243 | </listitem>
|
| 2244 |
|
| 2245 | <listitem>
|
| 2246 | <para><option>rule</option> is the thickness of the boundary of
|
| 2247 | the box;</para>
|
| 2248 | </listitem>
|
| 2249 |
|
| 2250 | <listitem>
|
| 2251 | <para><option>down</option> controls by how much boxes are pushed
|
| 2252 | down.</para>
|
| 2253 | </listitem>
|
| 2254 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 2255 |
|
| 2256 | <para>To obtain smaller boxes, one can e.g. use the command</para>
|
| 2257 |
|
| 2258 | <programlisting>\AMCboxDimensions{size=1.7ex,down=.2ex}</programlisting>
|
| 2259 |
|
| 2260 | <para>When using <option>separateanswersheet</option> package option,
|
| 2261 | you can also customize the boxes labeling. The default behavior is to
|
| 2262 | use uppercase alphabetical labeling, or arabic numbering if the
|
| 2263 | <option>digits</option> package option is used. To use your own
|
| 2264 | labeling, one has to redefine the <command>\AMCchoiceLabel</command>
|
| 2265 | command which takes as argument the name of the counter used to number
|
| 2266 | the choices. For example, the following code will ask for lowercase
|
| 2267 | letters to label the boxes:</para>
|
| 2268 |
|
| 2269 | <programlisting>\def\AMCchoiceLabel#1{\alph{#1}}</programlisting>
|
| 2270 |
|
| 2271 | <para>As an other example, when using <package>arabxetex</package>
|
| 2272 | package, the following code may be useful:</para>
|
| 2273 |
|
| 2274 | <programlisting>\def\AMCchoiceLabel#1{\textLR{\Alph{#1}}}</programlisting>
|
| 2275 |
|
| 2276 | <para>One can also change the style of the boxes labels redefining the
|
| 2277 | <command>\AMCchoiceLabelFormat</command> command, as in the following
|
| 2278 | example (here we need bold labels):</para>
|
| 2279 |
|
| 2280 | <programlisting>\def\AMCchoiceLabelFormat#1{\textbf{#1}}</programlisting>
|
| 2281 |
|
| 2282 | <para>Also note that the color of the boxes to be ticked by the
|
| 2283 | students can be set using</para>
|
| 2284 |
|
| 2285 | <programlisting>\AMCboxColor{red}</programlisting>
|
| 2286 |
|
| 2287 | <para>replacing <code>red</code> by the desired color (that must be
|
| 2288 | recognized by the <command>xcolor</command> package). For example, you
|
| 2289 | can get a light green with</para>
|
| 2290 |
|
| 2291 | <programlisting>\definecolor{amcboxcolor}{rgb}{0.67,0.88,0.5}
|
| 2292 | \AMCboxColor{amcboxcolor}</programlisting>
|
| 2293 | </sect3>
|
| 2294 |
|
| 2295 | <sect3>
|
| 2296 | <title>Questions presentation style</title>
|
| 2297 |
|
| 2298 | <para>The way each question is presented can be modified by redefining
|
| 2299 | the LaTeX command <command>AMCbeginQuestion</command>, whose default
|
| 2300 | definition is the following:</para>
|
| 2301 |
|
| 2302 | <para>
|
| 2303 | <programlisting>\def\AMCbeginQuestion#1#2{\par\noindent{\bf Question #1} #2\hspace*{1em}}</programlisting>
|
| 2304 | </para>
|
| 2305 |
|
| 2306 | <para>The first parameter transmitted to this command is the number of
|
| 2307 | the question to be displayed. The second parameter contains
|
| 2308 | <code>\multiSymbole</code> in the case of a multiple question, and is
|
| 2309 | void in all other cases. The <code>\multiSymbole</code> command too
|
| 2310 | can be modified: its goal is to distinguish multiple questions from
|
| 2311 | the others. By default, it displays a club.</para>
|
| 2312 |
|
| 2313 | <para>
|
| 2314 | <programlisting>\def\multiSymbole{$\clubsuit$}</programlisting>
|
| 2315 | </para>
|
| 2316 |
|
| 2317 | <para>Finally, one can modify the number of the next question with the
|
| 2318 | <code>\AMCnumero command</code>. At the beginning of each realization
|
| 2319 | of the test, a call to</para>
|
| 2320 |
|
| 2321 | <para>
|
| 2322 | <programlisting>\AMCnumero{1}</programlisting>
|
| 2323 | </para>
|
| 2324 |
|
| 2325 | <para>is performed, but this command can be used at any place.</para>
|
| 2326 |
|
| 2327 | <note>
|
| 2328 | <para>Each question must have a number, even it is not displayed, to
|
| 2329 | make sure of package cleveref's compatibility. Type
|
| 2330 | <command>\AMCquestionNumberfalse</command> command just after
|
| 2331 | <command>\AMCbeginQuestion</command> to have following numbers or
|
| 2332 | use the above command.</para>
|
| 2333 | </note>
|
| 2334 |
|
| 2335 | <para>The display of answers can be modified in the same fashion, if
|
| 2336 | one uses the <option>choicescustom</option> environment instead of
|
| 2337 | <option>choices</option> or <option>choiceshoriz</option>, redefining
|
| 2338 | the three following LaTeX macros:</para>
|
| 2339 |
|
| 2340 | <programlisting>\def\AMCbeginAnswer{}
|
| 2341 | \def\AMCendAnswer{}
|
| 2342 | \def\AMCanswer#1#2{#1 #2}
|
| 2343 | </programlisting>
|
| 2344 |
|
| 2345 | <para>One can also change spacing redefining the following dimensions
|
| 2346 | (here are the default values):</para>
|
| 2347 |
|
| 2348 | <programlisting>\AMCinterIrep=0pt
|
| 2349 | \AMCinterBrep=.5ex
|
| 2350 | \AMCinterIquest=0pt
|
| 2351 | \AMCinterBquest=3ex</programlisting>
|
| 2352 |
|
| 2353 | <para>These dimensions are the vertical space between questions
|
| 2354 | (<code>quest</code>) or answers (<code>rep</code>), in boxed mode
|
| 2355 | (<code>B</code>, with <command>\AMCBoxedAnswers</command> or
|
| 2356 | <option>box</option> package option) or standard mode
|
| 2357 | (<code>I</code>).</para>
|
| 2358 | </sect3>
|
| 2359 |
|
| 2360 | <sect3>
|
| 2361 | <title>Separate answer sheet presentation style</title>
|
| 2362 |
|
| 2363 | <para>It is also possible to modify the layout of the separate answer
|
| 2364 | sheet produced with the <option>separateanswersheet</option> option
|
| 2365 | (see section <xref linkend="secensemble"/>).</para>
|
| 2366 |
|
| 2367 | <orderedlist>
|
| 2368 | <listitem>
|
| 2369 | <para>If one only wants to modify the horizontal spacing between
|
| 2370 | two check-boxes or the vertical spacing between two questions, one
|
| 2371 | just has to redefine the following dimensions:</para>
|
| 2372 |
|
| 2373 | <programlisting>\AMCformHSpace=.3em
|
| 2374 | \AMCformVSpace=1.2ex
|
| 2375 | </programlisting>
|
| 2376 | </listitem>
|
| 2377 |
|
| 2378 | <listitem>
|
| 2379 | <para>For a deeper modification of the display settings, one can
|
| 2380 | also redefine the commands that are used at the beginning of each
|
| 2381 | question and for each answer (here follows the default
|
| 2382 | definitions):</para>
|
| 2383 |
|
| 2384 | <programlisting>\def\AMCformQuestion#1{\vspace{\AMCformVSpace}\par{\bf Question #1:}}
|
| 2385 | \def\AMCformAnswer#1{\hspace{\AMCformHSpace} #1}
|
| 2386 | </programlisting>
|
| 2387 | </listitem>
|
| 2388 | </orderedlist>
|
| 2389 |
|
| 2390 | <para>These definitions have to be inserted just after
|
| 2391 | <code>\begin{document}</code> in the LaTeX file.</para>
|
| 2392 | </sect3>
|
| 2393 |
|
| 2394 | <sect3 id="latex.codes">
|
| 2395 | <title>Code acquisition</title>
|
| 2396 |
|
| 2397 | <para>Code acquisition can be easily performed thanks to the LaTeX
|
| 2398 | command <command>AMCcode</command>, for instance to allow each student
|
| 2399 | to enter her/his student number by herself/himself on the answer
|
| 2400 | sheet. The two arguments of this command are a code/question
|
| 2401 | identifier, and the number of digits to be used by the code. One can
|
| 2402 | e.g. use the following header</para>
|
| 2403 |
|
| 2404 | <para>
|
| 2405 | <programlisting>{\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\hspace*{\fill}\AMCcode{etu}{8}\hspace*{\fill}
|
| 2406 | \begin{minipage}[b]{6.5cm}
|
| 2407 | $\longleftarrow{}$\hspace{0pt plus 1cm} please encode your student number below,
|
| 2408 | and write your first and last names below.
|
| 2409 |
|
| 2410 | \vspace{3ex}
|
| 2411 |
|
| 2412 | \hfill\namefield{\fbox{
|
| 2413 | \begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
|
| 2414 | Firstname and lastname:
|
| 2415 |
|
| 2416 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 2417 |
|
| 2418 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 2419 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 2420 | \end{minipage}
|
| 2421 | }}\hfill\vspace{5ex}\end{minipage}\hspace*{\fill}
|
| 2422 |
|
| 2423 | }
|
| 2424 | </programlisting>
|
| 2425 | </para>
|
| 2426 |
|
| 2427 | <para>If the <option>separateanswersheet</option> option is used, the
|
| 2428 | <command>AMCcode</command> command has to be placed after the
|
| 2429 | <command>AMCformBegin</command> command.</para>
|
| 2430 |
|
| 2431 | <para>Note that the codes rendering from <command>\AMCcode</command>
|
| 2432 | can be adapted modifying the lengths
|
| 2433 | <command>\AMCcodeHspace</command>, <command>\AMCcodeVspace</command>
|
| 2434 | and <command>\AMCcodeBoxSep</command>, representing the horizontal and
|
| 2435 | vertical amount of space between boxes, and the amount of space
|
| 2436 | between boxes and labels (when the labels are written outside the
|
| 2437 | boxes). Default values are set with the following commands:</para>
|
| 2438 |
|
| 2439 | <programlisting>\AMCcodeHspace=.5em
|
| 2440 | \AMCcodeVspace=.5em
|
| 2441 | \AMCcodeBoxSep=.1em</programlisting>
|
| 2442 |
|
| 2443 | <para>Note that an horizontal version <command>AMCcodeH</command> is
|
| 2444 | also available, specially for the case of small number of
|
| 2445 | digits.</para>
|
| 2446 | </sect3>
|
| 2447 |
|
| 2448 | <sect3 id="openquestions">
|
| 2449 | <title>Open questions</title>
|
| 2450 |
|
| 2451 | <para>One can sometimes require some open questions to be added to the
|
| 2452 | subject. One way to do so is to reserve boxes use to the teacher for
|
| 2453 | these questions. After the exam, the teacher reads the completed
|
| 2454 | answer sheets and tick the boxes according to the answers written by
|
| 2455 | the students for open questions. He will then scan the sheets and let
|
| 2456 | AMC correct the multiple choice questions and integrate the open
|
| 2457 | questions scores into the marks.<programlisting>\begin{question}{open}
|
| 2458 | Define \emph{inflation}.
|
| 2459 | \AMCOpen{lines=5}{\wrongchoice[W]{w}\scoring{0}\wrongchoice[P]{p}\scoring{1}\correctchoice[C]{c}\scoring{2}}
|
| 2460 | \end{question}
|
| 2461 | </programlisting></para>
|
| 2462 |
|
| 2463 | <para>In this example, the teacher will get three boxes. If the first
|
| 2464 | (labeled W for wrong) is ticked, the student will get 0 points. If the
|
| 2465 | second (labeled P for partial) is ticked, the student will get 1
|
| 2466 | point. If the third (labeled C for correct) is ticked, the student
|
| 2467 | will get 2 points.</para>
|
| 2468 |
|
| 2469 | <para>The first argument to <command>\AMCOpen</command> is a comma
|
| 2470 | separated list of options. The available options are:</para>
|
| 2471 |
|
| 2472 | <warning>
|
| 2473 | <para>At least one option is requiered to correctly compile the
|
| 2474 | file.</para>
|
| 2475 | </warning>
|
| 2476 |
|
| 2477 | <variablelist>
|
| 2478 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2479 | <term>lineup=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 2480 |
|
| 2481 | <listitem>
|
| 2482 | <para>if <code>true</code>, the answering area and the scoring
|
| 2483 | boxes will be on the same line. If <code>false</code> (this is
|
| 2484 | default), the answering area is enclosed in a frame and placed
|
| 2485 | below the scoring boxes.</para>
|
| 2486 | </listitem>
|
| 2487 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2488 |
|
| 2489 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2490 | <term>lines=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 2491 |
|
| 2492 | <listitem>
|
| 2493 | <para>sets the number of lines for the answer. Default value is
|
| 2494 | <code>1</code>.</para>
|
| 2495 | </listitem>
|
| 2496 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2497 |
|
| 2498 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2499 | <term>lineheight=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2500 |
|
| 2501 | <listitem>
|
| 2502 | <para>sets the height of each line. Default value is
|
| 2503 | <code>1cm</code>.</para>
|
| 2504 | </listitem>
|
| 2505 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2506 |
|
| 2507 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2508 | <term>dots=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 2509 |
|
| 2510 | <listitem>
|
| 2511 | <para>if <code>true</code> (Default), each line will be realized
|
| 2512 | by a line of dots.</para>
|
| 2513 | </listitem>
|
| 2514 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2515 |
|
| 2516 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2517 | <term>contentcommand=<replaceable>cmdname</replaceable></term>
|
| 2518 |
|
| 2519 | <listitem>
|
| 2520 | <para>Use this option if you want to customize the content of
|
| 2521 | the answer area. You will have to define a
|
| 2522 | <command>\<replaceable>cmdname</replaceable></command> command
|
| 2523 | that has to produce the content.</para>
|
| 2524 | </listitem>
|
| 2525 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2526 |
|
| 2527 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2528 | <term>hspace=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2529 |
|
| 2530 | <listitem>
|
| 2531 | <para>sets the space between boxes in the marking area.</para>
|
| 2532 | </listitem>
|
| 2533 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2534 |
|
| 2535 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2536 | <term>backgroundcol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 2537 |
|
| 2538 | <listitem>
|
| 2539 | <para>sets the background color of the marking area.</para>
|
| 2540 | </listitem>
|
| 2541 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2542 |
|
| 2543 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2544 | <term>foregroundcol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 2545 |
|
| 2546 | <listitem>
|
| 2547 | <para>sets the foreground color of the marking area.</para>
|
| 2548 | </listitem>
|
| 2549 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2550 |
|
| 2551 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2552 | <term>scan=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 2553 |
|
| 2554 | <listitem>
|
| 2555 | <para>if <code>false</code>, the boxes are not scanned (this can
|
| 2556 | be useful if you plan to use manual data capture only to mark
|
| 2557 | this question, and don't want to take into account the students
|
| 2558 | drawings on the boxes). Defaults to <code>true</code>.</para>
|
| 2559 | </listitem>
|
| 2560 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2561 |
|
| 2562 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2563 | <term>annotate=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 2564 |
|
| 2565 | <listitem>
|
| 2566 | <para>if <code>false</code> (default value), the boxes from this
|
| 2567 | question won't be annotated when annotating the answer sheets
|
| 2568 | (only the score will be written).</para>
|
| 2569 | </listitem>
|
| 2570 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2571 |
|
| 2572 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2573 | <term>question=<replaceable>text</replaceable></term>
|
| 2574 |
|
| 2575 | <listitem>
|
| 2576 | <para>sets a short text that helps the examiner to identify the
|
| 2577 | question. This text will be written before the scoring boxes,
|
| 2578 | only if a separate answer sheet is used.</para>
|
| 2579 |
|
| 2580 | <para>The question's identifier will be displayed if you type
|
| 2581 | question in the options list.</para>
|
| 2582 | </listitem>
|
| 2583 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2584 |
|
| 2585 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2586 | <term>answer=<replaceable>text</replaceable></term>
|
| 2587 |
|
| 2588 | <listitem>
|
| 2589 | <para>sets a short text that will be written in the answering
|
| 2590 | area for corrected answer sheets.</para>
|
| 2591 | </listitem>
|
| 2592 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2593 |
|
| 2594 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2595 | <term>width=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2596 |
|
| 2597 | <listitem>
|
| 2598 | <para>sets the width of the frame enclosing the answering area
|
| 2599 | when <code>lineup=false</code>. Default value is
|
| 2600 | <code>.95\linewidth</code>.</para>
|
| 2601 | </listitem>
|
| 2602 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2603 |
|
| 2604 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2605 | <term>framerule=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2606 |
|
| 2607 | <listitem>
|
| 2608 | <para>sets the line width for the frame enclosing the answering
|
| 2609 | area.</para>
|
| 2610 | </listitem>
|
| 2611 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2612 |
|
| 2613 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2614 | <term>framerulecol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 2615 |
|
| 2616 | <listitem>
|
| 2617 | <para>sets the frame color for the answering area.</para>
|
| 2618 | </listitem>
|
| 2619 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2620 |
|
| 2621 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2622 | <term>boxmargin=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2623 |
|
| 2624 | <listitem>
|
| 2625 | <para>sets the margin around the scoring boxes.</para>
|
| 2626 | </listitem>
|
| 2627 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2628 |
|
| 2629 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2630 | <term>boxframerule=<replaceable>dim</replaceable></term>
|
| 2631 |
|
| 2632 | <listitem>
|
| 2633 | <para>sets the line width for the frame around the scoring
|
| 2634 | boxes.</para>
|
| 2635 | </listitem>
|
| 2636 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2637 |
|
| 2638 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2639 | <term>boxframerulecol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 2640 |
|
| 2641 | <listitem>
|
| 2642 | <para>sets the color of the frame around the scoring
|
| 2643 | boxes.</para>
|
| 2644 | </listitem>
|
| 2645 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2646 | </variablelist>
|
| 2647 |
|
| 2648 | <para>You can set other default values (for the whole exam) for all
|
| 2649 | these parameters using the command <command>\AMCopenOpts</command>,
|
| 2650 | like</para>
|
| 2651 |
|
| 2652 | <programlisting>\AMCopenOpts{boxframerule=2pt,boxframerulecol=red}</programlisting>
|
| 2653 |
|
| 2654 | <para>Moreover, a little text can be written in the marking area to
|
| 2655 | tell the students not to tick these boxes, redefining the
|
| 2656 | <command>\AMCotextReserved</command> command, as:</para>
|
| 2657 |
|
| 2658 | <programlisting>\def\AMCotextReserved{\emph{Reserved}}</programlisting>
|
| 2659 |
|
| 2660 | <para>When using separate answer sheets, the text added to each open
|
| 2661 | question can also be defined, as:</para>
|
| 2662 |
|
| 2663 | <programlisting>\def\AMCotextGoto{\par{\bf\emph{Please write the answer on the separate answer sheet.}}}</programlisting>
|
| 2664 | </sect3>
|
| 2665 |
|
| 2666 | <sect3>
|
| 2667 | <title>One-letter answers</title>
|
| 2668 |
|
| 2669 | <para>Sometimes this is not necessary to write some long text to
|
| 2670 | describe answers, and one letter or symbol is enough. When using a
|
| 2671 | separate answer sheet, it is quite annoying to print the boxes both on
|
| 2672 | the question and on the answer sheet. In such cases, use
|
| 2673 | <command>\AMCBoxOnly</command> instead of the <code>choices</code>
|
| 2674 | environment:</para>
|
| 2675 |
|
| 2676 | <programlisting>\begin{question}{arm}
|
| 2677 | Which letter shows the \textit{arm} on the diagram?
|
| 2678 | \AMCBoxOnly{ordered=true}{\wrongchoice[A]{}\correctchoice[B]{}%
|
| 2679 | \wrongchoice[C]{}\wrongchoice[D]{}}
|
| 2680 | \end{question}</programlisting>
|
| 2681 |
|
| 2682 | <para>The first argument to <command>\AMCBoxOnly</command> is a comma
|
| 2683 | separated list of options. The available options are:</para>
|
| 2684 |
|
| 2685 | <variablelist>
|
| 2686 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2687 | <term>help=<replaceable>text</replaceable></term>
|
| 2688 |
|
| 2689 | <listitem>
|
| 2690 | <para>prints some reminder text before the boxes on the separate
|
| 2691 | answer sheet.</para>
|
| 2692 | </listitem>
|
| 2693 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2694 |
|
| 2695 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2696 | <term>ordered=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 2697 |
|
| 2698 | <listitem>
|
| 2699 | <para>if <code>true</code> (the default value is
|
| 2700 | <code>false</code>), the answers won't be shuffled.</para>
|
| 2701 | </listitem>
|
| 2702 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2703 | </variablelist>
|
| 2704 | </sect3>
|
| 2705 |
|
| 2706 | <sect3>
|
| 2707 | <title>Choice of shuffling parameters</title>
|
| 2708 |
|
| 2709 | <para>One can modify the seed of the random number generator used to
|
| 2710 | produce the shuffle, thanks to the following command (to be used just
|
| 2711 | at the beginning of the document, and in any case outside the
|
| 2712 | <command>onecopy</command> command):</para>
|
| 2713 |
|
| 2714 | <para>
|
| 2715 | <programlisting>\AMCrandomseed{1527384}</programlisting>
|
| 2716 | </para>
|
| 2717 |
|
| 2718 | <para>If the value that is assigned (to be chosen between 1 and
|
| 2719 | 4194303) is modified, then the shuffling will differ. Of course, one
|
| 2720 | must not modify this value after the test sheets have been
|
| 2721 | printed.</para>
|
| 2722 | </sect3>
|
| 2723 |
|
| 2724 | <sect3>
|
| 2725 | <title>Using sectioning and separate answer sheet</title>
|
| 2726 |
|
| 2727 | <para>For sectioning to be also visible in the separate answer sheet
|
| 2728 | (if any), use <command>\AMCsection</command> and
|
| 2729 | <command>\AMCsubsection</command> instead of
|
| 2730 | <command>\section</command> and <command>\subsection</command>.</para>
|
| 2731 | </sect3>
|
| 2732 |
|
| 2733 | <sect3>
|
| 2734 | <title>Using references inside the test sheets</title>
|
| 2735 |
|
| 2736 | <para>Using LaTeX commands <command>\label</command>,
|
| 2737 | <command>\ref</command> and <command>\pageref</command> within
|
| 2738 | questions or answers is problematic since they will be called with the
|
| 2739 | same arguments for every realization of the test, which will alter the
|
| 2740 | numbering of references. To solve this problem, one should use instead
|
| 2741 | the commands <command>\AMClabel</command>, <command>\AMCref</command>
|
| 2742 | and <command>\AMCpageref</command>: they add the realization number to
|
| 2743 | their argument before transmitting it to <command>\label</command>,
|
| 2744 | <command>\ref</command> and <command>\pageref</command>.</para>
|
| 2745 |
|
| 2746 | <note>
|
| 2747 | <para>If you updated the test version (1.2.2014.041103) to the
|
| 2748 | current version (1.2.2014.111201) or greater, you don't have to type
|
| 2749 | the command <command>\AMCqlabel</command> to label a question but
|
| 2750 | type <command>\AMClabel</command>. The old command remain compatible
|
| 2751 | with your previous tex files/exams.</para>
|
| 2752 | </note>
|
| 2753 |
|
| 2754 | <para>One also has to reset counters to zero at the beginning of each
|
| 2755 | realization. For instance, if one wants to include references to
|
| 2756 | pictures that are put together in a separate page, one might write
|
| 2757 | something like</para>
|
| 2758 |
|
| 2759 | <programlisting>\element{animals}{
|
| 2760 | \begin{figure}[p]
|
| 2761 | \centering
|
| 2762 | \includegraphics[width=.6\linewidth]{tiger}
|
| 2763 | \caption{An animal}
|
| 2764 | \AMClabel{tiger}
|
| 2765 | \end{figure}
|
| 2766 |
|
| 2767 | \begin{question}{tiger}
|
| 2768 | Which is the animal on figure~\AMCref{tiger} page~\AMCpageref{tiger}?
|
| 2769 | \begin{choices}
|
| 2770 | \correctchoice{A tiger}
|
| 2771 | \wrongchoice{A giraffe}
|
| 2772 | \wrongchoice{An elephant}
|
| 2773 | \wrongchoice{A cat}
|
| 2774 | \end{choices}
|
| 2775 | \end{question}
|
| 2776 | }</programlisting>
|
| 2777 |
|
| 2778 | <para>and it is then important to add, just after the command
|
| 2779 | <command>\onecopy</command> the line</para>
|
| 2780 |
|
| 2781 | <programlisting>\setcounter{figure}{0}</programlisting>
|
| 2782 |
|
| 2783 | <para>so that the numbering of figures starts at 1 for every
|
| 2784 | realization. Without that last command, the numbering of figures would
|
| 2785 | go on from one realization to the next one, which is clearly not
|
| 2786 | desirable.</para>
|
| 2787 | </sect3>
|
| 2788 |
|
| 2789 | <sect4 id="cleveref"><title>Using the package cleveref</title>
|
| 2790 | <para>This package sort in an ascending order the questions' numbers,
|
| 2791 | the questions' pages or the labels' pages (the documentation <ulink
|
| 2792 | url="http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cleveref/cleveref.pdf">http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/cleveref/cleveref.pdf</ulink>).</para>
|
| 2793 | <warning>
|
| 2794 | <para>This package must be declare <emphasis>after</emphasis> the
|
| 2795 | package <package>automultiplechoice</package>.</para>
|
| 2796 | </warning> To use this package, a new command was created:
|
| 2797 | <command>\AMCstudentlabel</command>. <para>
|
| 2798 | <programlisting>\cref{\AMCstudentlabel{led},\AMCstudentlabel{lamp},\AMCstudentlabel{motor}}</programlisting>
|
| 2799 | </para>
|
| 2800 | <para><emphasis>led</emphasis>,<emphasis>lamp</emphasis>,<emphasis>motor</emphasis>
|
| 2801 | are the created labels to reference the questions with the command
|
| 2802 | \AMClabel{}.</para></sect4>
|
| 2803 |
|
| 2804 | <sect3 id="AMCtext">
|
| 2805 | <title>Customizing some texts inserted by AMC</title>
|
| 2806 |
|
| 2807 | <para>Use <command>\AMCtext</command> for the following
|
| 2808 | customizations:</para>
|
| 2809 |
|
| 2810 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 2811 | <listitem>
|
| 2812 | <para><code>\AMCtext{none}{<replaceable>sentence</replaceable>}</code>
|
| 2813 | replaces « None of these answers are correct. » (the English
|
| 2814 | default text) with the given <replaceable>sentence</replaceable>
|
| 2815 | when using option <option>completemulti</option>.</para>
|
| 2816 | </listitem>
|
| 2817 |
|
| 2818 | <listitem>
|
| 2819 | <para><code>\AMCtext{corrected}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</code>
|
| 2820 | replaces « Corrected » (the English default text) with the given
|
| 2821 | <replaceable>title</replaceable> on the corrected answer
|
| 2822 | sheet.</para>
|
| 2823 | </listitem>
|
| 2824 |
|
| 2825 | <listitem>
|
| 2826 | <para><code>\AMCtext{catalog}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</code>
|
| 2827 | replaces « Catalog » (the English default text) with the given
|
| 2828 | <replaceable>title</replaceable> on the questions catalog produced
|
| 2829 | thanks to option <option>catalog</option>.</para>
|
| 2830 | </listitem>
|
| 2831 |
|
| 2832 | <listitem>
|
| 2833 | <para><code>\AMCtext{explain}{<replaceable>title</replaceable>}</code>
|
| 2834 | replaces « <emphasis>Explanation</emphasis> » (the English default
|
| 2835 | text) with the given <replaceable>title</replaceable> before the
|
| 2836 | explanations produced due to the <command>explain</command>
|
| 2837 | command.</para>
|
| 2838 |
|
| 2839 | <para>The default option for this command is:</para>
|
| 2840 |
|
| 2841 | <programlisting>\AMCtext{explain}{\textit{\textbf{Explanation: }}}</programlisting>
|
| 2842 | </listitem>
|
| 2843 |
|
| 2844 | <listitem>
|
| 2845 | <para>You can also consider using commands like the following ones
|
| 2846 | (here the second argument is set to the default English
|
| 2847 | value):</para>
|
| 2848 |
|
| 2849 | <programlisting>\AMCtext{draft}{DRAFT}
|
| 2850 | \AMCtext{message}{For your examination, preferably print documents
|
| 2851 | compiled from auto-multiple-choice.}</programlisting>
|
| 2852 | </listitem>
|
| 2853 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 2854 | </sect3>
|
| 2855 |
|
| 2856 | <sect3 id="binary.code">
|
| 2857 | <title id="binary.code.title">Binary code</title>
|
| 2858 |
|
| 2859 | <para>AMC identifies each test and the page number of test with the
|
| 2860 | binary code.</para>
|
| 2861 |
|
| 2862 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 2863 | <listitem>
|
| 2864 | <para>First row : 12 boxes (default value) : maximum number of
|
| 2865 | tests = 2^12-1 = 4 095.</para>
|
| 2866 | </listitem>
|
| 2867 |
|
| 2868 | <listitem>
|
| 2869 | <para>Second row : 6 first boxes (default value) : maximum number
|
| 2870 | of pages per tests = 2^6-1 = 63.</para>
|
| 2871 | </listitem>
|
| 2872 |
|
| 2873 | <listitem>
|
| 2874 | <para>Second row : 6 last boxes (default value) : check
|
| 2875 | code.</para>
|
| 2876 | </listitem>
|
| 2877 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 2878 |
|
| 2879 | <para>To raise the number of tests and/or pages per test modify the
|
| 2880 | commands' default values <command>\AMC@NCBetud</command>,
|
| 2881 | <command>\AMC@NCBpage</command> et
|
| 2882 | <command>\AMC@NCBcheck</command>.</para>
|
| 2883 |
|
| 2884 | <para>Load those commands below in the preambule (here with the
|
| 2885 | default values).</para>
|
| 2886 |
|
| 2887 | <programlisting>
|
| 2888 | \makeatletter
|
| 2889 | \AMC@NCBetud=12
|
| 2890 | \AMC@NCBpage=6
|
| 2891 | \AMC@NCBcheck=6
|
| 2892 | \makeatother
|
| 2893 | </programlisting>
|
| 2894 |
|
| 2895 | <note>
|
| 2896 | <para>The values <command>\AMC@NCBpage</command> and
|
| 2897 | <command>\AMC@NCBcheck</command> must be equal.</para>
|
| 2898 | </note>
|
| 2899 | </sect3>
|
| 2900 | </sect2>
|
| 2901 |
|
| 2902 | <sect2>
|
| 2903 | <title>Options for AMC</title>
|
| 2904 |
|
| 2905 | <para>You can add in the source file header (the first lines that begin
|
| 2906 | with a '%') some options to be passed to AMC:</para>
|
| 2907 |
|
| 2908 | <variablelist>
|
| 2909 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2910 | <term><code>%%AMC:preprocess_command=<replaceable>commandname</replaceable></code></term>
|
| 2911 |
|
| 2912 | <listitem>
|
| 2913 | <para>tells AMC to run the <replaceable>commandname</replaceable>
|
| 2914 | command before calling LaTeX to process the source file. This
|
| 2915 | command will be run inside the project directory, and the name of
|
| 2916 | a source file copy will be passed as an argument. There is no
|
| 2917 | problem for <replaceable>commandname</replaceable> to change this
|
| 2918 | file content, because this is only a copy.</para>
|
| 2919 | </listitem>
|
| 2920 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2921 |
|
| 2922 | <varlistentry>
|
| 2923 | <term><code>%%AMC:latex_engine=<replaceable>engine</replaceable></code></term>
|
| 2924 |
|
| 2925 | <listitem>
|
| 2926 | <para>tells AMC to set the LaTeX engine to use for this file,
|
| 2927 | regardless to the one entered as a preference by the user.</para>
|
| 2928 | </listitem>
|
| 2929 | </varlistentry>
|
| 2930 | </variablelist>
|
| 2931 | </sect2>
|
| 2932 |
|
| 2933 | <sect2>
|
| 2934 | <title>Mathematical questions with randomized statements</title>
|
| 2935 |
|
| 2936 | <sect3>
|
| 2937 | <title>Using package fp</title>
|
| 2938 |
|
| 2939 | <para>Thanks to the LaTeX package <package>fp</package>, whose
|
| 2940 | documentation is available at <ulink
|
| 2941 | url="http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fp/README">http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fp/README</ulink>,
|
| 2942 | and which can be downloaded with the command <programlisting>\usepackage{fp}</programlisting>added
|
| 2943 | before that corresponding to <package>automultiplechoice</package>,
|
| 2944 | one can create exercises with randomized numerical data. Let us start
|
| 2945 | with a simple example.</para>
|
| 2946 |
|
| 2947 | <para><programlisting>\begin{question}{addition}
|
| 2948 | \FPeval\VQa{trunc(1+random*8,0)} <co id="alea.random"
|
| 2949 | linkends="alea.random.exp"/>
|
| 2950 | \FPeval\VQb{trunc(4+random*5,0)}
|
| 2951 | \FPeval\VQsomme{clip(VQa+VQb)} <co id="alea.result"
|
| 2952 | linkends="alea.result.exp"/>
|
| 2953 | \FPeval\VQnonA{clip(VQa+VQb-1)} <co id="alea.fausse"
|
| 2954 | linkends="alea.fausse.exp"/>
|
| 2955 | \FPeval\VQnonB{clip(VQa*VQb)}
|
| 2956 | \FPeval\VQnonC{clip(VQa-VQb)}
|
| 2957 |
|
| 2958 | What is the sum of \VQa{} and \VQb{} ?
|
| 2959 | \begin{choiceshoriz}
|
| 2960 | \correctchoice{\VQsomme}
|
| 2961 | \wrongchoice{\VQnonA}
|
| 2962 | \wrongchoice{\VQnonB}
|
| 2963 | \wrongchoice{\VQnonC}
|
| 2964 | \end{choiceshoriz}
|
| 2965 | \end{question}</programlisting></para>
|
| 2966 |
|
| 2967 | <para>The <command>\FPeval</command> command is used to perform
|
| 2968 | computations:</para>
|
| 2969 |
|
| 2970 | <para><calloutlist>
|
| 2971 | <callout arearefs="alea.random" id="alea.random.exp">
|
| 2972 | <para>Since <command>random</command> returns a real number in
|
| 2973 | the interval [0,1], this command sets VQa to a random integer
|
| 2974 | value between 1 and 8. The next line sets VQb to a random
|
| 2975 | integer value between 4 and 8.</para>
|
| 2976 | </callout>
|
| 2977 |
|
| 2978 | <callout arearefs="alea.result" id="alea.result.exp">
|
| 2979 | <para>Putting the correct answer in the variable VQsomme.</para>
|
| 2980 | </callout>
|
| 2981 |
|
| 2982 | <callout arearefs="alea.fausse" id="alea.fausse.exp">
|
| 2983 | <para>Putting wrong answers in variables VQnonA, VQnonB and
|
| 2984 | VQnonC...</para>
|
| 2985 | </callout>
|
| 2986 | </calloutlist>Variable names beginning with VQ have been chosen so
|
| 2987 | as to avoid interference with other LaTeX commands.</para>
|
| 2988 |
|
| 2989 | <sect4 id="latex.intervals">
|
| 2990 | <title>Choosing an interval</title>
|
| 2991 |
|
| 2992 | <para>The <command>automultiplechoice</command> package moreover
|
| 2993 | defines a <command>\AMCIntervals</command> command which makes this
|
| 2994 | kind of construction simpler, as illustrated in the next
|
| 2995 | example:<programlisting>\begin{question}{inf-expo-indep}
|
| 2996 | \FPeval\VQa{trunc(2 + random * 4,0)}
|
| 2997 | \FPeval\VQb{trunc(6 + random * 5,0)}
|
| 2998 | \FPeval\VQr{VQa/(VQa+VQb)}
|
| 2999 |
|
| 3000 | Let $X$ and $Y$ be two independent random variables, following the exponential distribution with
|
| 3001 | respective parameters \VQa{} and \VQb{}.
|
| 3002 | To which interval does the probability $\mathbb{P}[X<Y]$ belong ?
|
| 3003 |
|
| 3004 | \begin{multicols}{5}
|
| 3005 | \begin{choices}[o]
|
| 3006 | \AMCIntervals{\VQr}{0}{1}{0.1} <co id="choix.intervalles"
|
| 3007 | linkends="choix.intervalles.exp"/>
|
| 3008 | \end{choices}
|
| 3009 | \end{multicols}
|
| 3010 | \end{question}</programlisting></para>
|
| 3011 |
|
| 3012 | <calloutlist>
|
| 3013 | <callout arearefs="choix.intervalles" id="choix.intervalles.exp">
|
| 3014 | <para>This lines inserts ten answers corresponding to the
|
| 3015 | intervals [0,0.1[ [0.1,0.2[ ... [0.9,1[, while indicating that
|
| 3016 | the correct interval is the one containing VQr. The arguments of
|
| 3017 | the <command>\AMCIntervals</command> command are the
|
| 3018 | following:</para>
|
| 3019 |
|
| 3020 | <orderedlist>
|
| 3021 | <listitem>
|
| 3022 | <para>The correct answer,</para>
|
| 3023 | </listitem>
|
| 3024 |
|
| 3025 | <listitem>
|
| 3026 | <para>The left point of the first interval,</para>
|
| 3027 | </listitem>
|
| 3028 |
|
| 3029 | <listitem>
|
| 3030 | <para>The right point of the last interval,</para>
|
| 3031 | </listitem>
|
| 3032 |
|
| 3033 | <listitem>
|
| 3034 | <para>The length of each interval.</para>
|
| 3035 | </listitem>
|
| 3036 | </orderedlist>
|
| 3037 | </callout>
|
| 3038 | </calloutlist>
|
| 3039 |
|
| 3040 | <para>Note that the interval formatting can be changed redefining
|
| 3041 | the <command>\AMCintervalFormat</command> command, which is
|
| 3042 | originally defined as</para>
|
| 3043 |
|
| 3044 | <programlisting>\def\AMCIntervalFormat#1#2{[#1,\,#2[}</programlisting>
|
| 3045 |
|
| 3046 | <para>to follow local conventions (writing [a,b) instead of [a,b[ is
|
| 3047 | for example a common usage).</para>
|
| 3048 | </sect4>
|
| 3049 |
|
| 3050 | <sect4 id="latex.numeric">
|
| 3051 | <title>Coding the result</title>
|
| 3052 |
|
| 3053 | <para>The students can also be asked to code the numerical answer,
|
| 3054 | using the <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> command, as in the
|
| 3055 | following example:</para>
|
| 3056 |
|
| 3057 | <programlisting>\begin{questionmultx}{sqrt}
|
| 3058 | \FPeval\VQa{trunc(5+random*15,0)}
|
| 3059 | \FPeval\VQs{VQa^0.5}
|
| 3060 | Compute $\sqrt{\VQa}$ and round it with two digits after period.
|
| 3061 |
|
| 3062 | \AMCnumericChoices{\VQs}{digits=3,decimals=2,sign=true,
|
| 3063 | borderwidth=0pt,backgroundcol=lightgray,approx=5}
|
| 3064 | \end{questionmultx}
|
| 3065 | </programlisting>
|
| 3066 |
|
| 3067 | <para>Note the use of <code>questionmultx</code> environment: we
|
| 3068 | need this question to be multiple as several boxes has to be ticked,
|
| 3069 | but we can’t say that several answers are correct, so we don’t show
|
| 3070 | the symbol for multiple questions.</para>
|
| 3071 |
|
| 3072 | <para>Available options that can be used in the second argument of
|
| 3073 | the <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> command are the following
|
| 3074 | (<replaceable>bool</replaceable> can be <code>true</code> or
|
| 3075 | <code>false</code>, and <replaceable>color</replaceable> must be a
|
| 3076 | color known by the <command>xcolor</command> package):</para>
|
| 3077 |
|
| 3078 | <variablelist>
|
| 3079 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3080 | <term>digits=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3081 |
|
| 3082 | <listitem>
|
| 3083 | <para>gives the number of digits to request (defaults to
|
| 3084 | 3).</para>
|
| 3085 | </listitem>
|
| 3086 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3087 |
|
| 3088 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3089 | <term>decimals=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3090 |
|
| 3091 | <listitem>
|
| 3092 | <para>gives the number of digits after period to request
|
| 3093 | (defaults to 0). Note that when <replaceable>num</replaceable>
|
| 3094 | is positive, the LaTeX package <command>fp</command> must be
|
| 3095 | loaded.</para>
|
| 3096 | </listitem>
|
| 3097 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3098 |
|
| 3099 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3100 | <term>base=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3101 |
|
| 3102 | <listitem>
|
| 3103 | <para>gives the base for <code>digits</code> and
|
| 3104 | <code>decimals</code> (defaults to 10).</para>
|
| 3105 | </listitem>
|
| 3106 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3107 |
|
| 3108 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3109 | <term>significant=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3110 |
|
| 3111 | <listitem>
|
| 3112 | <para>if <code>true</code>, the numbers to code are the first
|
| 3113 | significant digits from the first argument of
|
| 3114 | <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command>. For example, the right
|
| 3115 | answer to
|
| 3116 | <code>\AMCnumericChoices{56945.23}{digits=2,significant=true}</code>
|
| 3117 | is 57.</para>
|
| 3118 | </listitem>
|
| 3119 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3120 |
|
| 3121 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3122 | <term>nozero=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3123 |
|
| 3124 | <listitem>
|
| 3125 | <para>if true, the choice 0 is removed for all digits. May be
|
| 3126 | useful when using <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> to
|
| 3127 | enter small (<10) positive values.</para>
|
| 3128 | </listitem>
|
| 3129 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3130 |
|
| 3131 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3132 | <term>sign=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3133 |
|
| 3134 | <listitem>
|
| 3135 | <para>requests (or not) a signed value (defaults to
|
| 3136 | true).</para>
|
| 3137 | </listitem>
|
| 3138 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3139 |
|
| 3140 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3141 | <term>strict=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3142 |
|
| 3143 | <listitem>
|
| 3144 | <para>if <code>true</code>, a box has to be ticked for every
|
| 3145 | digit and for the sign. If <code>false</code>, if some digits
|
| 3146 | has no ticked box, they will be set to zero. Defaults to
|
| 3147 | <code>false</code>.</para>
|
| 3148 | </listitem>
|
| 3149 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3150 |
|
| 3151 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3152 | <term>vertical=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3153 |
|
| 3154 | <listitem>
|
| 3155 | <para>if true, each digit is represented on one raw. If false
|
| 3156 | (default), each digit is represented on one line.</para>
|
| 3157 | </listitem>
|
| 3158 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3159 |
|
| 3160 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3161 | <term>reverse=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3162 |
|
| 3163 | <listitem>
|
| 3164 | <para>if true, place higher values of the digits on the top in
|
| 3165 | <code>vertical</code> mode (defaults to true).</para>
|
| 3166 | </listitem>
|
| 3167 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3168 |
|
| 3169 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3170 | <term>vhead=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3171 |
|
| 3172 | <listitem>
|
| 3173 | <para>if true, in <code>vertical</code> mode, a header is
|
| 3174 | placed over all digits rows, made using the command
|
| 3175 | <command>\AMCntextVHead</command> that is originally defined
|
| 3176 | as</para>
|
| 3177 |
|
| 3178 | <programlisting>\def\AMCntextVHead#1{\emph{b#1}}</programlisting>
|
| 3179 |
|
| 3180 | <para>This default value is useful to number the binary
|
| 3181 | digits.</para>
|
| 3182 |
|
| 3183 | <para>Default value is <code>false</code>.</para>
|
| 3184 | </listitem>
|
| 3185 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3186 |
|
| 3187 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3188 | <term>hspace=<replaceable>space</replaceable></term>
|
| 3189 |
|
| 3190 | <listitem>
|
| 3191 | <para>sets the horizontal space between boxes (defaults to
|
| 3192 | <code>.5em</code>).</para>
|
| 3193 | </listitem>
|
| 3194 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3195 |
|
| 3196 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3197 | <term>vspace=<replaceable>space</replaceable></term>
|
| 3198 |
|
| 3199 | <listitem>
|
| 3200 | <para>sets the vertical space between boxes (defaults to
|
| 3201 | <code>1ex</code>).</para>
|
| 3202 | </listitem>
|
| 3203 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3204 |
|
| 3205 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3206 | <term>borderwidth=<replaceable>space</replaceable></term>
|
| 3207 |
|
| 3208 | <listitem>
|
| 3209 | <para>sets the width of the frame border around all the boxes
|
| 3210 | (defaults to <code>1mm</code>).</para>
|
| 3211 | </listitem>
|
| 3212 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3213 |
|
| 3214 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3215 | <term>bordercol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 3216 |
|
| 3217 | <listitem>
|
| 3218 | <para>sets the color of the frame (defaults to
|
| 3219 | <code>lightgray</code>).</para>
|
| 3220 | </listitem>
|
| 3221 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3222 |
|
| 3223 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3224 | <term>backgroundcol=<replaceable>color</replaceable></term>
|
| 3225 |
|
| 3226 | <listitem>
|
| 3227 | <para>sets the background color (defaults to
|
| 3228 | <code>white</code>).</para>
|
| 3229 | </listitem>
|
| 3230 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3231 |
|
| 3232 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3233 | <term>Tsign=<replaceable>text</replaceable></term>
|
| 3234 |
|
| 3235 | <listitem>
|
| 3236 | <para>sets the text to print at the top of the boxes to set
|
| 3237 | the sign (Can also be redefined by
|
| 3238 | <code>\def\AMCntextSign{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</code>,
|
| 3239 | and defaults to be empty).</para>
|
| 3240 | </listitem>
|
| 3241 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3242 |
|
| 3243 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3244 | <term>Tpoint=<replaceable>text</replaceable></term>
|
| 3245 |
|
| 3246 | <listitem>
|
| 3247 | <para>sets the text for the period. Can also be redefined by
|
| 3248 | <code>\def\AMCdecimalPoint{<replaceable>text</replaceable>}</code>,
|
| 3249 | and defaults to <code>\raisebox{1ex}{\bf .}</code>.</para>
|
| 3250 | </listitem>
|
| 3251 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3252 |
|
| 3253 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3254 | <term>scoring=<replaceable>bool</replaceable></term>
|
| 3255 |
|
| 3256 | <listitem>
|
| 3257 | <para>if <code>true</code>, a scoring strategy is given to AMC
|
| 3258 | for this question. Defaults to <code>true</code>.</para>
|
| 3259 | </listitem>
|
| 3260 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3261 |
|
| 3262 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3263 | <term>scoreexact=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3264 |
|
| 3265 | <listitem>
|
| 3266 | <para>gives the score for an exact answer (defaults to
|
| 3267 | 2).</para>
|
| 3268 | </listitem>
|
| 3269 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3270 |
|
| 3271 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3272 | <term>exact=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3273 |
|
| 3274 | <listitem>
|
| 3275 | <para>sets the maximal distance to the correct integer value
|
| 3276 | (value without the decimal point) for an answer to be said
|
| 3277 | <emphasis>exact</emphasis> and be rewarded to
|
| 3278 | <code>scoreexact</code> points (defaults to 0).</para>
|
| 3279 | </listitem>
|
| 3280 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3281 |
|
| 3282 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3283 | <term>scoreapprox=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3284 |
|
| 3285 | <listitem>
|
| 3286 | <para>gives the score for an
|
| 3287 | <emphasis>approximative</emphasis> answer (defaults to
|
| 3288 | 1).</para>
|
| 3289 | </listitem>
|
| 3290 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3291 |
|
| 3292 | <varlistentry>
|
| 3293 | <term>approx=<replaceable>num</replaceable></term>
|
| 3294 |
|
| 3295 | <listitem>
|
| 3296 | <para>sets the maximal distance to the correct integer value
|
| 3297 | (value without the decimal point) for an answer to be said
|
| 3298 | <emphasis>approximative</emphasis> and be rewarded to
|
| 3299 | <code>scoreapprox</code> points (defaults to 0).</para>
|
| 3300 | </listitem>
|
| 3301 | </varlistentry>
|
| 3302 | </variablelist>
|
| 3303 |
|
| 3304 | <para>You can set other default values (for the whole exam) for all
|
| 3305 | these parameters using the command
|
| 3306 | <command>\AMCnumericOpts</command>, like</para>
|
| 3307 |
|
| 3308 | <programlisting>\AMCnumericOpts{scoreexact=3,borderwidth=2pt}</programlisting>
|
| 3309 |
|
| 3310 | <para>Moreover, the text added at the end of the questions using
|
| 3311 | <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> when not in the separate
|
| 3312 | answer sheet (and when a separate answer sheet is requested by the
|
| 3313 | <code>separateanswersheet</code> package option) can also be set
|
| 3314 | redefining the <command>\AMCntextGoto</command> command, as:</para>
|
| 3315 |
|
| 3316 | <programlisting>\def\AMCntextGoto{\par{\bf\emph{Please code the answer on
|
| 3317 | the separate answer sheet.}}}</programlisting>
|
| 3318 | </sect4>
|
| 3319 | </sect3>
|
| 3320 |
|
| 3321 | <sect3>
|
| 3322 | <title>Using package pgf/tikz</title>
|
| 3323 |
|
| 3324 | <para>This package must be declare <emphasis>after</emphasis> the
|
| 3325 | package <package>automultiplechoice</package>.</para>
|
| 3326 |
|
| 3327 | <para>LaTeX package <package>pgf/tikz</package> (see <ulink
|
| 3328 | url="http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/pgf/base">http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/pgf/base</ulink>)
|
| 3329 | provides mathematical functions that can be loaded with
|
| 3330 | <programlisting>\usepackage{tikz}</programlisting></para>
|
| 3331 |
|
| 3332 | <para>First of all, you must set the random seed to be sure to get the
|
| 3333 | same result each time latex is run to compile the subject:</para>
|
| 3334 |
|
| 3335 | <para><programlisting>\pgfmathsetseed{2056}</programlisting></para>
|
| 3336 |
|
| 3337 | <sect4>
|
| 3338 | <title>A simple computation</title>
|
| 3339 |
|
| 3340 | <para>Here is an example with a simple computation:</para>
|
| 3341 |
|
| 3342 | <para><programlisting>\begin{question}{inverse}
|
| 3343 | \pgfmathrandominteger{\x}{1}{50}
|
| 3344 |
|
| 3345 | How much is the reciprocal of $x=\x$?
|
| 3346 |
|
| 3347 | \begin{choices}
|
| 3348 | \correctchoice{\pgfmathparse{1/\x}\pgfmathresult }
|
| 3349 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{1/(\x +1))}\pgfmathresult}
|
| 3350 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{cos(\x)} \pgfmathresult}
|
| 3351 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{\x^(-0.5)}\pgfmathresult}
|
| 3352 | \end{choices}
|
| 3353 | \end{question}
|
| 3354 | </programlisting></para>
|
| 3355 |
|
| 3356 | <para>Here, the command <command>\pgfmathparse</command> makes the
|
| 3357 | computation, and <command>\pgfmathresult</command> outputs the
|
| 3358 | result.</para>
|
| 3359 |
|
| 3360 | <para>Output formatting is also available with the command
|
| 3361 | <command>\pgfmathprintnumber</command>, as in the following example
|
| 3362 | (three digits after decimal point, and use of the comma as a decimal
|
| 3363 | point).</para>
|
| 3364 |
|
| 3365 | <para><programlisting>\begin{question}{inverse3}
|
| 3366 | \pgfmathrandominteger{\x}{1}{50}
|
| 3367 | \pgfkeys{/pgf/number format/.cd,fixed,fixed zerofill,precision=3,use comma}
|
| 3368 | How much is the reciprocal of $x=\pgfmathprintnumber{\x}$?
|
| 3369 |
|
| 3370 | \begin{choices}
|
| 3371 | \correctchoice{\pgfmathparse{1/\x}\pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}}
|
| 3372 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{1/(\x +1))} \pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}}
|
| 3373 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{cos(\x)} \pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}}
|
| 3374 | \wrongchoice{\pgfmathparse{\x^(-0.5)} \pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}}
|
| 3375 | \end{choices}
|
| 3376 | \end{question}
|
| 3377 | </programlisting><note>
|
| 3378 | <para>You can also use the <command>\AMCIntervals</command> and
|
| 3379 | <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> commands (see <xref
|
| 3380 | linkend="latex.intervals"/> and <xref
|
| 3381 | linkend="latex.numeric"/>)</para>
|
| 3382 | </note></para>
|
| 3383 | </sect4>
|
| 3384 |
|
| 3385 | <sect4>
|
| 3386 | <title>Graphics</title>
|
| 3387 |
|
| 3388 | <para>The tkiz package also allows to make (random or not)
|
| 3389 | graphs.</para>
|
| 3390 |
|
| 3391 | <para><programlisting>\begin{questionmult}{graph}
|
| 3392 | Let us consider the three functions which graphs are plotted below:
|
| 3393 | \pgfmathrandominteger{\a}{2}{4}
|
| 3394 | \begin{center}
|
| 3395 | \begin{tikzpicture}[domain=0:4]
|
| 3396 | \draw[very thin,color=gray] (-0.1,-4.1) grid (3.9,3.9);
|
| 3397 | \draw[->] (-0.2,0) -- (4.2,0) node[right] {$x$};
|
| 3398 | \draw[->] (0,-4.2) -- (0,4.2) node[above] {$f(x)$};
|
| 3399 | \draw[color=red] plot (\x,{(1+\a/4)*\x-\a}) node[right] {$f_{1} (x)$};
|
| 3400 | \draw[color=blue] plot (\x,{\a*sin(\x r)}) node[right] {$f_{2}(x)$};
|
| 3401 | \draw[color=orange] plot (\x,{\a*cos(\x r)}) node[right] {$f_{3}(x)$};
|
| 3402 | \end{tikzpicture}
|
| 3403 | \end{center}
|
| 3404 | Then:
|
| 3405 | \begin{choices}
|
| 3406 | \pgfmathrandominteger{\x0}{2}{4}
|
| 3407 | \correctchoice{$f_{2}(\x0)$=\pgfmathparse{\a*sin(\x0 r)} \pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}.}
|
| 3408 | \correctchoice{$f_{3}(\x0)$=\pgfmathparse{\a*cos(\x0 r)} \pgfmathprintnumber{\pgfmathresult}.}
|
| 3409 | \wrongchoice{La fonction $f_{1}(x)$ est une fonction linéaire.}
|
| 3410 | \end{choices}
|
| 3411 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 3412 | </programlisting></para>
|
| 3413 |
|
| 3414 | <para>To make pretty graphs, package <package>pgfplots</package> can
|
| 3415 | also be useful.</para>
|
| 3416 |
|
| 3417 | <para>With pgfmath, precision is limited, so that a "Arithmetic
|
| 3418 | overflow" error can be encountered. Packages <package>tikz</package>
|
| 3419 | and <package>pgfplots</package> allows to overcome this problem,
|
| 3420 | using <command>gnuplot</command> as a backend. You need to install
|
| 3421 | <command>gnuplot</command> on your system, and use LaTeX option
|
| 3422 | <option>--shell-escape</option>. To this purpose, go to AMC
|
| 3423 | preferences window, and set the LaTeX engine for your project to
|
| 3424 | "<option>pdflatex --shell-escape</option>" (without the
|
| 3425 | quotes).</para>
|
| 3426 | </sect4>
|
| 3427 | </sect3>
|
| 3428 |
|
| 3429 | <sect3>
|
| 3430 | <title>Using LuaLaTeX</title>
|
| 3431 |
|
| 3432 | <para>LUA language can be used inside LaTeX documents thanks to the
|
| 3433 | <command>lualatex</command> command. If you uses it, your document
|
| 3434 | needs to be UTF-8 encoded, and you must not load the
|
| 3435 | <package>inputenc</package> package. See <ulink
|
| 3436 | url="http://www.luatex.org/documentation.html">http://www.luatex.org/documentation.html</ulink>
|
| 3437 | for some information.</para>
|
| 3438 |
|
| 3439 | <para>LUA commands are to be given as a <command>\directlua</command>
|
| 3440 | argument. The most useful LUA function is
|
| 3441 | <command>tex.print</command>, which will output results back to
|
| 3442 | LaTeX.</para>
|
| 3443 |
|
| 3444 | <para>Once again, if you use random numbers, always fix the random
|
| 3445 | seed to get the same results across different compilations:</para>
|
| 3446 |
|
| 3447 | <programlisting>\directlua{math.randomseed (2048)}</programlisting>
|
| 3448 |
|
| 3449 | <para>Here is a very simple sample source file:</para>
|
| 3450 |
|
| 3451 | <programlisting>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 3452 | %\usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
|
| 3453 | \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
| 3454 | \usepackage[box,completemulti]{automultiplechoice}
|
| 3455 | \begin{document}
|
| 3456 |
|
| 3457 | \onecopy{10}{
|
| 3458 |
|
| 3459 | %%% head
|
| 3460 |
|
| 3461 | \noindent{\bf QCM \hfill TEST}
|
| 3462 |
|
| 3463 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 3464 | \begin{minipage}{.4\linewidth}
|
| 3465 | \centering\large\bf LuaLaTeX sample exam
|
| 3466 | \end{minipage}
|
| 3467 | \namefield{\fbox{\begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 3468 | Name :
|
| 3469 |
|
| 3470 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 3471 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 3472 | \end{minipage}}}
|
| 3473 |
|
| 3474 | %%%
|
| 3475 |
|
| 3476 | \directlua{math.randomseed (2048)}
|
| 3477 | \directlua{a=math.random()}
|
| 3478 |
|
| 3479 | \begin{question}{square-root}
|
| 3480 | How much is the square root of \directlua{tex.print(a)}?
|
| 3481 |
|
| 3482 | \begin{choices}
|
| 3483 | \correctchoice{\directlua{tex.print(math.sqrt(a))}}
|
| 3484 | \wrongchoice{\directlua{tex.print(math.sqrt(2*a))}}
|
| 3485 | \wrongchoice{\directlua{tex.print(math.sqrt(a*1.001))}}
|
| 3486 | \end{choices}
|
| 3487 | \end{question}
|
| 3488 |
|
| 3489 | \clearpage
|
| 3490 | }
|
| 3491 |
|
| 3492 | \end{document} </programlisting>
|
| 3493 |
|
| 3494 | <para>Output formatting can be obtained using lua functions, or with
|
| 3495 | the <package>siunitx</package> package.</para>
|
| 3496 |
|
| 3497 | <note>
|
| 3498 | <para>You can also use the <command>\AMCIntervals</command> and
|
| 3499 | <command>\AMCnumericChoices</command> commands (see <xref
|
| 3500 | linkend="latex.intervals"/> and <xref
|
| 3501 | linkend="latex.numeric"/>)</para>
|
| 3502 | </note>
|
| 3503 | </sect3>
|
| 3504 | </sect2>
|
| 3505 | </sect1>
|
| 3506 |
|
| 3507 | <sect1 id="graphical-interface">
|
| 3508 | <title>Usage - Graphical interface</title>
|
| 3509 |
|
| 3510 | <para>We shall describe here a usage example with the graphic interface
|
| 3511 | from the conception of the multiple-choice test until the edition of
|
| 3512 | students' scores.</para>
|
| 3513 |
|
| 3514 | <sect2>
|
| 3515 | <title>Creating a new project and subject</title>
|
| 3516 |
|
| 3517 | <para>Let's open the graphic interface. This can be done ordinarily by
|
| 3518 | selecting <menuchoice>
|
| 3519 | <guimenu>Applications</guimenu>
|
| 3520 |
|
| 3521 | <guisubmenu>Education</guisubmenu>
|
| 3522 |
|
| 3523 | <guimenuitem>Auto Multiple Choice</guimenuitem>
|
| 3524 | </menuchoice> in the general menu of Gnome (or its equivalent in KDE
|
| 3525 | or other), but the command <userinput>auto-multiple-choice</userinput>
|
| 3526 | can be used directly.</para>
|
| 3527 |
|
| 3528 | <para>Let's now create a new project, thanks to <menuchoice>
|
| 3529 | <guimenu>Project</guimenu>
|
| 3530 |
|
| 3531 | <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
|
| 3532 | </menuchoice>. A window opens and allows us to see existing project
|
| 3533 | names (if any) and choose a name for our new project (made with simple
|
| 3534 | characters; « test » will be OK for our short test), which we write in
|
| 3535 | the field <guilabel>Project name</guilabel>. Then we push the
|
| 3536 | <guibutton>New project</guibutton> button.</para>
|
| 3537 |
|
| 3538 | <para>Now we must choose a LaTeX file as a source for the
|
| 3539 | multiple-choice. Several possibilities are shown:</para>
|
| 3540 |
|
| 3541 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 3542 | <listitem>
|
| 3543 | <para><guilabel>model</guilabel>: this choice allows to choose from
|
| 3544 | models shipped with AMC an exam to customize later.</para>
|
| 3545 | </listitem>
|
| 3546 |
|
| 3547 | <listitem>
|
| 3548 | <para><guilabel>file</guilabel>: this choice allows to choose a
|
| 3549 | LaTeX file already prepared for this exam. Somebody may have
|
| 3550 | prepared the exam for you, or you can have prepared the exam outside
|
| 3551 | AMC, using your favorite LaTeX editor.</para>
|
| 3552 | </listitem>
|
| 3553 |
|
| 3554 | <listitem>
|
| 3555 | <para><guilabel>empty</guilabel>: using this choice, an empty LaTeX
|
| 3556 | file will be created. You have to edit it to compose the exam from
|
| 3557 | zero.</para>
|
| 3558 | </listitem>
|
| 3559 |
|
| 3560 | <listitem>
|
| 3561 | <para><guilabel>archive</guilabel>: use this choice if you have a
|
| 3562 | zip or tgz archive containing the exam definition (LaTeX source
|
| 3563 | file, along with image files, parameters file for example). This
|
| 3564 | archive can be made by an external software. It can also be a backup
|
| 3565 | of one of your AMC projects.</para>
|
| 3566 | </listitem>
|
| 3567 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 3568 |
|
| 3569 | <para>For our test, let us choose <guilabel>model</guilabel>. The next
|
| 3570 | window presents the models: choose for example <guilabel>Simple
|
| 3571 | example</guilabel> from <guilabel>[EN] Documentation group</guilabel>.
|
| 3572 | Now we can edit it to modify the shape of the document or the questions,
|
| 3573 | thanks to the <guibutton>Edit LaTeX file</guibutton> button which
|
| 3574 | launches the default editor.</para>
|
| 3575 | </sect2>
|
| 3576 |
|
| 3577 | <sect2>
|
| 3578 | <title>Preparing the subject</title>
|
| 3579 |
|
| 3580 | <para>Preparing a project is done in two steps. First we must make the
|
| 3581 | reference documents from the LaTeX source file. This can be done by
|
| 3582 | clicking the <guibutton>Update documents</guibutton>. The following
|
| 3583 | documents are produced:</para>
|
| 3584 |
|
| 3585 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 3586 | <listitem>
|
| 3587 | <para>The <emphasis>question</emphasis>. This file can be printed to
|
| 3588 | distribute its pages to students (see below).</para>
|
| 3589 | </listitem>
|
| 3590 |
|
| 3591 | <listitem>
|
| 3592 | <para>The <emphasis>solution</emphasis>. We can check that the
|
| 3593 | chosen responses there are the good ones. It is also made to be
|
| 3594 | distributed to students.</para>
|
| 3595 | </listitem>
|
| 3596 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 3597 |
|
| 3598 | <para>When produced, those documents can be viewed (and possibly
|
| 3599 | printed) from the corresponding buttons.</para>
|
| 3600 |
|
| 3601 | <para>Now we can begin the last step of the preparation: analyzing the
|
| 3602 | layout. It can be launched with the button <guibutton>Layout
|
| 3603 | detection</guibutton>. This analysis detects, in every page of the
|
| 3604 | subject, the exact position of every element which must be analyzed in
|
| 3605 | the students' copies.</para>
|
| 3606 |
|
| 3607 | <para>To check whether the layouts have been correctly detected, we can
|
| 3608 | use the button <guibutton>Check layouts</guibutton>. A short insight
|
| 3609 | allows to check that red checkboxes are correctly located over the boxes
|
| 3610 | of the subject.</para>
|
| 3611 | </sect2>
|
| 3612 |
|
| 3613 | <sect2 id="printing">
|
| 3614 | <title id="printing.title">Printing and exam</title>
|
| 3615 |
|
| 3616 | <para>Two alternative workflows can be considered:</para>
|
| 3617 |
|
| 3618 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 3619 | <listitem>
|
| 3620 | <para>For the most robust, create as many exam sheets as necessary
|
| 3621 | for all your students, with different sheets numbers, and print them
|
| 3622 | all. Each page can be identified by its numbers and boxes at the
|
| 3623 | top, so that you can scan several times the same completed answer
|
| 3624 | sheet page carefree.</para>
|
| 3625 | </listitem>
|
| 3626 |
|
| 3627 | <listitem>
|
| 3628 | <para>Secondly, you can print a few subjects (or only one if you
|
| 3629 | want), and photocopy them to get one subject for all students.
|
| 3630 | Questions shuffling will be less efficient, and if you give several
|
| 3631 | times a scan of the same page, AMC won't be able to know about it
|
| 3632 | and will create an unwanted duplicate.</para>
|
| 3633 | </listitem>
|
| 3634 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 3635 |
|
| 3636 | <warning>
|
| 3637 | <para>To use this second workflow using photocopies, there must be
|
| 3638 | only one page for students to write on (using a separate answer sheet
|
| 3639 | can help you for this). If not, you won't be able to continue with
|
| 3640 | AMC! Indeed, it would be impossible for AMC to make the link between
|
| 3641 | two pages from the same student.</para>
|
| 3642 | </warning>
|
| 3643 |
|
| 3644 | <para>When the preparation is over, we can print the subject, and
|
| 3645 | distribute it to the students... In simple cases, we can directly print
|
| 3646 | from the viewer (after clicking the line <guilabel>Subject</guilabel> in
|
| 3647 | the list of work documents). When it is better to print the copies
|
| 3648 | separately (for example if copies contain multiple pages and when the
|
| 3649 | printer allows to staple them together), we shall rather use the button
|
| 3650 | <guibutton>Print copies</guibutton> after calculating the layout.</para>
|
| 3651 |
|
| 3652 | <important>
|
| 3653 | <para>When the subject is printed and distributed, we may no more
|
| 3654 | modify the <emphasis>work documents</emphasis> because they must
|
| 3655 | remain identical to distributed copies.</para>
|
| 3656 | </important>
|
| 3657 | </sect2>
|
| 3658 |
|
| 3659 | <sect2>
|
| 3660 | <title>Reading the copies</title>
|
| 3661 |
|
| 3662 | <para>Now we shall describe the input from students' copies, which can
|
| 3663 | be done automatically and/or manually.</para>
|
| 3664 |
|
| 3665 | <para>Let's move to the <guilabel>Data capture</guilabel> tab of the
|
| 3666 | graphical interface.</para>
|
| 3667 |
|
| 3668 | <sect3>
|
| 3669 | <title>Automated input</title>
|
| 3670 |
|
| 3671 | <para>For automatic recognition of the checked boxes in the students'
|
| 3672 | pages, they must be previously digitalized. I use a copier/scanner
|
| 3673 | which does it automatically (all the pages in a bundle without
|
| 3674 | interaction with me), with the following settings: 300 dpi, OCR mode
|
| 3675 | (for the characters' recognition, black and white without grayscale -
|
| 3676 | but the scanner does not process any character recognition), each scan
|
| 3677 | delivered as a single TIFF file per page.</para>
|
| 3678 |
|
| 3679 | <note>
|
| 3680 | <para>To analyze the scans, we must have them in one or several
|
| 3681 | image files (TIFF, JPG, PNG, etc.). Vector graphics formats (PDF, PS
|
| 3682 | or EPS) are also suitable: scans will then be converted into PNG by
|
| 3683 | AMC before analysis.</para>
|
| 3684 | </note>
|
| 3685 |
|
| 3686 | <note>
|
| 3687 | <para>When giving scans for automated data capture the first time,
|
| 3688 | you will have tell AMC which method you used: either different
|
| 3689 | papers printed, or photocopied papers (see <xref
|
| 3690 | endterm="printing.title" linkend="printing"/>).</para>
|
| 3691 | </note>
|
| 3692 |
|
| 3693 | <para>Then we select this set of scan files in the dialog opened by
|
| 3694 | the button <guibutton>Automated</guibutton> of the section
|
| 3695 | <guilabel>Data capture after examination</guilabel>, then we validate
|
| 3696 | with the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button. AMC begins with Optical
|
| 3697 | Mark Recognition to detect the position of the four circle corner
|
| 3698 | marks on the scans, position the boxes, and detects the amount of
|
| 3699 | black pixels in each box.</para>
|
| 3700 |
|
| 3701 | <para>The result of the analysis of each page is indicated in the
|
| 3702 | lists of the section <guilabel>Diagnosis</guilabel>:</para>
|
| 3703 |
|
| 3704 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 3705 | <listitem>
|
| 3706 | <para>The value <emphasis>MSD</emphasis> (mean square deviation)
|
| 3707 | is an indication of the good framing of the marks (the four black
|
| 3708 | dots surrounding each copy). When it is too great, the framing
|
| 3709 | must be checked (right click on the page's line then choose
|
| 3710 | <guimenuitem>page</guimenuitem> to view the scanned page and the
|
| 3711 | boxes as they were detected).</para>
|
| 3712 | </listitem>
|
| 3713 |
|
| 3714 | <listitem>
|
| 3715 | <para>The value <emphasis>sensitivity</emphasis> is an indicator
|
| 3716 | of proximity of the filling of the boxes with the threshold. If it
|
| 3717 | is too great (from 8 to its max value 10), we must check whether
|
| 3718 | the boxes recognized as checked are the good ones (a right click
|
| 3719 | on the page's line the choose <guimenuitem>zoom</guimenuitem> to
|
| 3720 | view the set of boxes in the copy, verify whether the detection
|
| 3721 | worked correctly, and correct it if needed drag-and-dropping the
|
| 3722 | boxes images).</para>
|
| 3723 | </listitem>
|
| 3724 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 3725 | </sect3>
|
| 3726 |
|
| 3727 | <sect3>
|
| 3728 | <title>Manual input</title>
|
| 3729 |
|
| 3730 | <para>If we cannot use easily the scanner, or if, for a few copies,
|
| 3731 | the automated input did not work as expected, we can manage the input
|
| 3732 | manually. To do so, let's open the right window thanks to the button
|
| 3733 | <guibutton>Manual</guibutton> of the section <guilabel>Input of the
|
| 3734 | copies after exam</guilabel>. In that window, we can input the boxes
|
| 3735 | which have been checked ourselves (by clicking them) on the wanted
|
| 3736 | pages.</para>
|
| 3737 |
|
| 3738 | <note>
|
| 3739 | <para>Every manual input will overwrite results eventually coming
|
| 3740 | from a previous or posterior automated input for the same
|
| 3741 | page.</para>
|
| 3742 | </note>
|
| 3743 | </sect3>
|
| 3744 | </sect2>
|
| 3745 |
|
| 3746 | <sect2>
|
| 3747 | <title>Correction</title>
|
| 3748 |
|
| 3749 | <para>In the <guilabel>Marking</guilabel> tab of the graphic interface,
|
| 3750 | the part <guilabel>Marking</guilabel> allows us to deduce the scores of
|
| 3751 | the students from the inputs, but also to read the codes written by the
|
| 3752 | students (see <xref linkend="latex.codes"/>).</para>
|
| 3753 |
|
| 3754 | <sect3>
|
| 3755 | <title>Process</title>
|
| 3756 |
|
| 3757 | <para>The computation of the scores is launched with the button
|
| 3758 | <guibutton>Mark</guibutton>, but we must previously make the following
|
| 3759 | choice:</para>
|
| 3760 |
|
| 3761 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 3762 | <listitem>
|
| 3763 | <para>If we check the box <guilabel>Update marking
|
| 3764 | scale</guilabel>, the scoring strategy will be first extracted
|
| 3765 | from the LaTeX source file. This allows to try many strategies at
|
| 3766 | the end of the correction process. This action also updates which
|
| 3767 | answers are specified as correct or as wrong. Hence, potential
|
| 3768 | mistakes in the answers can be easily fixed after the exam. The
|
| 3769 | method to specify the strategy in the LaTeX file will be explained
|
| 3770 | in the section <xref endterm="bareme.title" linkend="bareme"/> (a
|
| 3771 | default scoring strategy is used when no indication is
|
| 3772 | given).</para>
|
| 3773 | </listitem>
|
| 3774 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 3775 |
|
| 3776 | <para>When we click the button <guibutton>Mark</guibutton>, the
|
| 3777 | correction is made (this can take some time if we also asked for the
|
| 3778 | reading of the scale).</para>
|
| 3779 | </sect3>
|
| 3780 |
|
| 3781 | <sect3 id="bareme">
|
| 3782 | <title id="bareme.title">Scoring strategy</title>
|
| 3783 |
|
| 3784 | <para>The strategy used to score the copies is indicated in the LaTeX
|
| 3785 | source file, with the command <command>scoring</command>. It can be
|
| 3786 | used in an environment <command>question</command> or
|
| 3787 | <command>questionmult</command>, to set it for every response, but
|
| 3788 | also in the environment <command>choices</command>, to give scaling
|
| 3789 | indications about a single response. The argument of the LaTeX command
|
| 3790 | scoring is made of indications like
|
| 3791 | <code><replaceable>parameter</replaceable>=<replaceable>value</replaceable></code>,
|
| 3792 | separated by comas. The usable parameters are the following (the table
|
| 3793 | shows also in which context those parameters can be used):</para>
|
| 3794 |
|
| 3795 | <informaltable>
|
| 3796 | <tgroup cols="6">
|
| 3797 | <colspec align="center" colname="param" colwidth="3pc"/>
|
| 3798 |
|
| 3799 | <colspec align="center" colname="q" colwidth="1pc"/>
|
| 3800 |
|
| 3801 | <colspec align="center" colname="r" colwidth="1pc"/>
|
| 3802 |
|
| 3803 | <colspec align="center" colname="qm" colwidth="1pc"/>
|
| 3804 |
|
| 3805 | <colspec align="center" colname="rm" colwidth="1pc"/>
|
| 3806 |
|
| 3807 | <colspec align="left" colname="valeur"/>
|
| 3808 |
|
| 3809 | <spanspec nameend="r" namest="q" spanname="simple"/>
|
| 3810 |
|
| 3811 | <spanspec nameend="rm" namest="qm" spanname="multiple"/>
|
| 3812 |
|
| 3813 | <tbody>
|
| 3814 | <row>
|
| 3815 | <entry morerows="1">parameter</entry>
|
| 3816 |
|
| 3817 | <entry spanname="simple">simple</entry>
|
| 3818 |
|
| 3819 | <entry spanname="multiple">multiple</entry>
|
| 3820 |
|
| 3821 | <entry morerows="1">value</entry>
|
| 3822 | </row>
|
| 3823 |
|
| 3824 | <row>
|
| 3825 | <entry>Q</entry>
|
| 3826 |
|
| 3827 | <entry>A</entry>
|
| 3828 |
|
| 3829 | <entry>Q</entry>
|
| 3830 |
|
| 3831 | <entry>A</entry>
|
| 3832 | </row>
|
| 3833 |
|
| 3834 | <row>
|
| 3835 | <entry>e</entry>
|
| 3836 |
|
| 3837 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3838 |
|
| 3839 | <entry/>
|
| 3840 |
|
| 3841 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3842 |
|
| 3843 | <entry/>
|
| 3844 |
|
| 3845 | <entry>The score given when responses are incoherent: many
|
| 3846 | boxes checked for a simple question, or, for a multiple
|
| 3847 | question, the box "none of the responses are correct" checked
|
| 3848 | while another box is also checked.</entry>
|
| 3849 | </row>
|
| 3850 |
|
| 3851 | <row>
|
| 3852 | <entry>v</entry>
|
| 3853 |
|
| 3854 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3855 |
|
| 3856 | <entry/>
|
| 3857 |
|
| 3858 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3859 |
|
| 3860 | <entry/>
|
| 3861 |
|
| 3862 | <entry>The score given in case of no response (no box is
|
| 3863 | checked).</entry>
|
| 3864 | </row>
|
| 3865 |
|
| 3866 | <row>
|
| 3867 | <entry>d</entry>
|
| 3868 |
|
| 3869 | <entry/>
|
| 3870 |
|
| 3871 | <entry/>
|
| 3872 |
|
| 3873 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3874 |
|
| 3875 | <entry/>
|
| 3876 |
|
| 3877 | <entry>An offset, i.e. a value added to every score not
|
| 3878 | relevant of parameters e and v.</entry>
|
| 3879 | </row>
|
| 3880 |
|
| 3881 | <row>
|
| 3882 | <entry>p</entry>
|
| 3883 |
|
| 3884 | <entry/>
|
| 3885 |
|
| 3886 | <entry/>
|
| 3887 |
|
| 3888 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3889 |
|
| 3890 | <entry/>
|
| 3891 |
|
| 3892 | <entry>The bottom score. If the calculation of the score in
|
| 3893 | that question yields a value below the bottom value, the sore
|
| 3894 | is set to the bottom value.</entry>
|
| 3895 | </row>
|
| 3896 |
|
| 3897 | <row>
|
| 3898 | <entry>b</entry>
|
| 3899 |
|
| 3900 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3901 |
|
| 3902 | <entry/>
|
| 3903 |
|
| 3904 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3905 |
|
| 3906 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3907 |
|
| 3908 | <entry>Score for a good response to a question.</entry>
|
| 3909 | </row>
|
| 3910 |
|
| 3911 | <row>
|
| 3912 | <entry>m</entry>
|
| 3913 |
|
| 3914 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3915 |
|
| 3916 | <entry/>
|
| 3917 |
|
| 3918 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3919 |
|
| 3920 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3921 |
|
| 3922 | <entry>Score for a bad response to a question.</entry>
|
| 3923 | </row>
|
| 3924 |
|
| 3925 | <row>
|
| 3926 | <entry/>
|
| 3927 |
|
| 3928 | <entry/>
|
| 3929 |
|
| 3930 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3931 |
|
| 3932 | <entry/>
|
| 3933 |
|
| 3934 | <entry/>
|
| 3935 |
|
| 3936 | <entry>Without parameter name (syntax:
|
| 3937 | <code>\scoring{2}</code>), this indicates the score to give if
|
| 3938 | the student has checked <emphasis>this</emphasis>
|
| 3939 | response.</entry>
|
| 3940 | </row>
|
| 3941 |
|
| 3942 | <row>
|
| 3943 | <entry>auto</entry>
|
| 3944 |
|
| 3945 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3946 |
|
| 3947 | <entry/>
|
| 3948 |
|
| 3949 | <entry/>
|
| 3950 |
|
| 3951 | <entry/>
|
| 3952 |
|
| 3953 | <entry>With this parameter, the value of the response numbered
|
| 3954 | <replaceable>i</replaceable> will be
|
| 3955 | <replaceable>auto</replaceable>+<replaceable>i</replaceable>-1.
|
| 3956 | This option is mainly used with
|
| 3957 | <code>\QuestionIndicative</code> (see section <xref
|
| 3958 | endterm="latex.qr.title" linkend="latex.qr"/>).</entry>
|
| 3959 | </row>
|
| 3960 |
|
| 3961 | <row>
|
| 3962 | <entry>mz</entry>
|
| 3963 |
|
| 3964 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3965 |
|
| 3966 | <entry/>
|
| 3967 |
|
| 3968 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3969 |
|
| 3970 | <entry/>
|
| 3971 |
|
| 3972 | <entry>This parameter is used for a "maximum or zero" scoring:
|
| 3973 | if all the answers are correct, the score is
|
| 3974 | <replaceable>mz</replaceable>. If not, the score is
|
| 3975 | zero.</entry>
|
| 3976 | </row>
|
| 3977 |
|
| 3978 | <row>
|
| 3979 | <entry>haut</entry>
|
| 3980 |
|
| 3981 | <entry/>
|
| 3982 |
|
| 3983 | <entry/>
|
| 3984 |
|
| 3985 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3986 |
|
| 3987 | <entry/>
|
| 3988 |
|
| 3989 | <entry>When you give this parameter a value
|
| 3990 | <replaceable>n</replaceable>, the score given for a perfect
|
| 3991 | response will be <replaceable>n</replaceable>, and one point
|
| 3992 | will be withdrawn for each error.</entry>
|
| 3993 | </row>
|
| 3994 |
|
| 3995 | <row>
|
| 3996 | <entry>MAX</entry>
|
| 3997 |
|
| 3998 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 3999 |
|
| 4000 | <entry/>
|
| 4001 |
|
| 4002 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4003 |
|
| 4004 | <entry/>
|
| 4005 |
|
| 4006 | <entry>Gives the maximal value given for the question (for a
|
| 4007 | "question scored 5", one can write MAX=5). To be used only
|
| 4008 | when it is not the same value as when one replies every good
|
| 4009 | response.</entry>
|
| 4010 | </row>
|
| 4011 |
|
| 4012 | <row>
|
| 4013 | <entry>formula</entry>
|
| 4014 |
|
| 4015 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4016 |
|
| 4017 | <entry/>
|
| 4018 |
|
| 4019 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4020 |
|
| 4021 | <entry/>
|
| 4022 |
|
| 4023 | <entry>Gives the score to be given for the question, often
|
| 4024 | using a formula that uses some variables (see <xref
|
| 4025 | linkend="scoring.global"/>), without taking <code>b</code> and
|
| 4026 | <code>m</code> values into account.</entry>
|
| 4027 | </row>
|
| 4028 |
|
| 4029 | <row>
|
| 4030 | <entry>set.<replaceable>XXX</replaceable></entry>
|
| 4031 |
|
| 4032 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4033 |
|
| 4034 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4035 |
|
| 4036 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4037 |
|
| 4038 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4039 |
|
| 4040 | <entry>Gives a particular value to the variable named
|
| 4041 | <replaceable>XXX</replaceable>, that will be available in a
|
| 4042 | <code>formula</code>. In an answer context, the value is
|
| 4043 | associated to the variable only if the box is ticked. As a
|
| 4044 | particular case, give a non-null value to the variable
|
| 4045 | <varname>INVALID</varname> to declare the responses incoherent
|
| 4046 | (so that the score will be given by the variable
|
| 4047 | <code>e</code>).</entry>
|
| 4048 | </row>
|
| 4049 |
|
| 4050 | <row>
|
| 4051 | <entry>default.<replaceable>XXX</replaceable></entry>
|
| 4052 |
|
| 4053 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4054 |
|
| 4055 | <entry/>
|
| 4056 |
|
| 4057 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4058 |
|
| 4059 | <entry/>
|
| 4060 |
|
| 4061 | <entry>Gives a value to the variable
|
| 4062 | <replaceable>XXX</replaceable> in the case when no ticked
|
| 4063 | boxes gave a value to <replaceable>XXX</replaceable>.</entry>
|
| 4064 | </row>
|
| 4065 |
|
| 4066 | <row>
|
| 4067 | <entry>requires.<replaceable>XXX</replaceable></entry>
|
| 4068 |
|
| 4069 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4070 |
|
| 4071 | <entry/>
|
| 4072 |
|
| 4073 | <entry>●</entry>
|
| 4074 |
|
| 4075 | <entry/>
|
| 4076 |
|
| 4077 | <entry>Tells that the variable <replaceable>XXX</replaceable>
|
| 4078 | has to be defined, unless the data is told
|
| 4079 | <emphasis>incoherent</emphasis> and the question scored with
|
| 4080 | the value of <code>e</code>.</entry>
|
| 4081 | </row>
|
| 4082 | </tbody>
|
| 4083 | </tgroup>
|
| 4084 | </informaltable>
|
| 4085 |
|
| 4086 | <para>The default scale for a simple question is
|
| 4087 | <code>e=0,v=0,b=1,m=0</code>, which gives one point for a good
|
| 4088 | response and no point in the other cases. The default scaling for a
|
| 4089 | multiple question is <code>e=0,v=0,b=1,m=0,p=-100,d=0</code>, which
|
| 4090 | gives a point for every checked box, either good or not (good box
|
| 4091 | checked or wrong box not checked).</para>
|
| 4092 |
|
| 4093 | <para>The LaTeX command <command>\scoring</command> can also be used
|
| 4094 | outside question definitions, for whole examination parameters:</para>
|
| 4095 |
|
| 4096 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4097 | <listitem>
|
| 4098 | <para><code>SUF=</code><replaceable>x</replaceable> gives a total
|
| 4099 | number of points sufficient to get the maximal mark. For example,
|
| 4100 | with 10 for the maximal mark and parameter <code>SUF=8</code>, a
|
| 4101 | student getting a total of 6 points will get mark 6/8*10=7.5,
|
| 4102 | whatever the value of the total number of points for a perfect
|
| 4103 | answer sheet.</para>
|
| 4104 | </listitem>
|
| 4105 |
|
| 4106 | <listitem>
|
| 4107 | <para><code>allowempty=<replaceable>x</replaceable></code> allows
|
| 4108 | the student to leave <replaceable>x</replaceable> questions
|
| 4109 | unanswered. When summing up questions scores,
|
| 4110 | <replaceable>x</replaceable> unanswered questions will be
|
| 4111 | canceled.</para>
|
| 4112 | </listitem>
|
| 4113 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4114 |
|
| 4115 | <para>Using all of these parameters in combination allows to define
|
| 4116 | many kinds of scoring strategies, as in the following example:</para>
|
| 4117 |
|
| 4118 | <para> |
| 4119 | DESC: Example (from the documentation) with different scoring strategies.--><programlisting
|
| 4120 | id="modeles-scoring.tex" linenumbering="numbered">\documentclass{article}
|
| 4121 |
|
| 4122 | \usepackage[utf8x]{inputenc}
|
| 4123 | \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
|
| 4124 |
|
| 4125 | \usepackage[box,completemulti]{automultiplechoice}
|
| 4126 |
|
| 4127 | \begin{document}
|
| 4128 |
|
| 4129 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4130 | \begin{question}{good choice}
|
| 4131 | How many points would you like for this question?
|
| 4132 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4133 | \correctchoice{Maximum: 10}\scoring{10}
|
| 4134 | \wrongchoice{Only 5}\scoring{5}
|
| 4135 | \wrongchoice{Two will be enough}\scoring{2}
|
| 4136 | \wrongchoice{None, thanks}\scoring{0}
|
| 4137 | \end{choices}
|
| 4138 | \end{question}
|
| 4139 | }
|
| 4140 |
|
| 4141 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4142 | \begin{questionmult}{added}
|
| 4143 | Get free points checking the following boxes:
|
| 4144 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4145 | \correctchoice{2 points}\scoring{b=2}
|
| 4146 | \wrongchoice{One negative point!}\scoring{b=0,m=-1}
|
| 4147 | \correctchoice{3 points}\scoring{b=3}
|
| 4148 | \correctchoice{1 point}
|
| 4149 | \correctchoice{Half point}\scoring{b=0.5}
|
| 4150 | \end{choices}
|
| 4151 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 4152 | }
|
| 4153 |
|
| 4154 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4155 | \begin{questionmult}{3 or zero}\scoring{mz=3}
|
| 4156 | Only a perfect response will be scored 3 points - otherwise, null score.
|
| 4157 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4158 | \wrongchoice{Wrong}
|
| 4159 | \wrongchoice{Wrong}
|
| 4160 | \correctchoice{Right}
|
| 4161 | \correctchoice{Right}
|
| 4162 | \end{choices}
|
| 4163 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 4164 | }
|
| 4165 |
|
| 4166 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4167 | \begin{questionmult}{all for 2}\scoring{haut=2}
|
| 4168 | Perfect response scored 2 points, and give back one point for any error...
|
| 4169 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4170 | \correctchoice{Right}
|
| 4171 | \correctchoice{This one is OK}
|
| 4172 | \correctchoice{Yes!}
|
| 4173 | \wrongchoice{False!}
|
| 4174 | \wrongchoice{Don't check!}
|
| 4175 | \end{choices}
|
| 4176 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 4177 | }
|
| 4178 |
|
| 4179 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4180 | \begin{question}{attention}\scoring{b=2}
|
| 4181 | Some very bad answer yields here to a negative score (-2), but the correct answer is rewarded 2 points.
|
| 4182 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4183 | \correctchoice{Good!}
|
| 4184 | \wrongchoice{Not correct}
|
| 4185 | \wrongchoice{Not correct}
|
| 4186 | \wrongchoice{Not correct}
|
| 4187 | \wrongchoice{Very bad answer!}\scoring{-2}
|
| 4188 | \end{choices}
|
| 4189 | \end{question}
|
| 4190 | }
|
| 4191 |
|
| 4192 | \element{qqs}{
|
| 4193 | \begin{questionmult}{as you like}
|
| 4194 | Choose how much points you need:
|
| 4195 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4196 | \correctchoice{You take two points here}\scoring{b=2}
|
| 4197 | \wrongchoice{Check to give 3 points}\scoring{b=0,m=3}
|
| 4198 | \correctchoice{Get one if checked, but give one if not}\scoring{m=-1}
|
| 4199 | \end{choices}
|
| 4200 | \end{questionmult}
|
| 4201 | }
|
| 4202 |
|
| 4203 | %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
| 4204 |
|
| 4205 | \onecopy{20}{
|
| 4206 |
|
| 4207 | \noindent{\bf QCM \hfill Scoring strategy test}
|
| 4208 |
|
| 4209 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 4210 | \begin{minipage}{.4\linewidth}
|
| 4211 | \centering\large\bf Test\\ Jan. 2008\end{minipage}
|
| 4212 | \namefield{\fbox{\begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 4213 | Name:
|
| 4214 |
|
| 4215 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 4216 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 4217 | \end{minipage}}}
|
| 4218 |
|
| 4219 | %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
| 4220 |
|
| 4221 | \shufflegroup{qqs}
|
| 4222 |
|
| 4223 | \insertgroup{qqs}
|
| 4224 |
|
| 4225 | %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
|
| 4226 |
|
| 4227 | \clearpage
|
| 4228 |
|
| 4229 | }
|
| 4230 |
|
| 4231 | \end{document}</programlisting></para>
|
| 4232 | </sect3>
|
| 4233 |
|
| 4234 | <sect3 id="scoring.global">
|
| 4235 | <title>Global scoring strategy</title>
|
| 4236 |
|
| 4237 | <para>To use a strategy globally for a set of questions, one can
|
| 4238 | define it in a LaTeX command, as in the following example:</para>
|
| 4239 |
|
| 4240 | <programlisting>\def\barQmult{haut=3,p=-1}
|
| 4241 |
|
| 4242 | \begin{questionmult}\scoring{\barQmult}
|
| 4243 | [...]
|
| 4244 | \end{questionmult}</programlisting>
|
| 4245 |
|
| 4246 | <para>Another possibility comes with the LaTeX commands
|
| 4247 | <command>\scoringDefaultS</command> and
|
| 4248 | <command>\scoringDefaultM</command>, to be used in the begin of the
|
| 4249 | document (outside the command <command>\onecopy</command>), which
|
| 4250 | allow to give default values for the scoring strategy of simple and
|
| 4251 | multiple questions:</para>
|
| 4252 |
|
| 4253 | <programlisting>\scoringDefaultM{haut=3,p=-1}</programlisting>
|
| 4254 |
|
| 4255 | <para>If you use <command>formula</command> with
|
| 4256 | <command>\scoringDefautM</command> or
|
| 4257 | <command>\scoringDefautS</command>, you must cancel it to score
|
| 4258 | different questions with a specific scoring.</para>
|
| 4259 |
|
| 4260 | <programlisting>
|
| 4261 | \begin{questionmult}\scoring{b=1,m=-0.5,formula=}
|
| 4262 | [...]
|
| 4263 | \end{questionmult}</programlisting>
|
| 4264 |
|
| 4265 | <para>In some cases, defining a global strategy can be interesting
|
| 4266 | <emphasis>depending of the number of proposed responses</emphasis>. To
|
| 4267 | do so, just input the value <varname>N</varname>. For example, to get
|
| 4268 | a scale yielding 4 as the maximal score and such as the mean expected
|
| 4269 | score of a student checking randomly the boxes is 1, one can use the
|
| 4270 | scale <code>d=4,b=0,m=-(4-1)*2/N</code> (which give the score -2 if
|
| 4271 | every response is false, i.e. the wrong boxes have been checked and
|
| 4272 | the right boxes are not). Operations allowed in those formulas are the
|
| 4273 | four simple operations (<code>+</code> <code>-</code> <code>*</code>
|
| 4274 | <code>/</code>), cases operator <code>( ? : )</code>, parenthesis and
|
| 4275 | all perl operators.</para>
|
| 4276 |
|
| 4277 | <para>Other variables can also be used:</para>
|
| 4278 |
|
| 4279 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4280 | <listitem>
|
| 4281 | <para><varname>N</varname> is the number of proposed responses,
|
| 4282 | without counting the response eventually added by the option
|
| 4283 | <option>completemulti</option>.</para>
|
| 4284 | </listitem>
|
| 4285 |
|
| 4286 | <listitem>
|
| 4287 | <para><varname>NB</varname> is the number of correct responses to
|
| 4288 | the question (without taking in account checked or non-checked
|
| 4289 | boxes).</para>
|
| 4290 | </listitem>
|
| 4291 |
|
| 4292 | <listitem>
|
| 4293 | <para><varname>NBC</varname> is the count of correct responses
|
| 4294 | which have been checked.</para>
|
| 4295 | </listitem>
|
| 4296 |
|
| 4297 | <listitem>
|
| 4298 | <para><varname>NM</varname> is the number of wrong responses to
|
| 4299 | the question (without taking in account checked or non-checked
|
| 4300 | boxes).</para>
|
| 4301 | </listitem>
|
| 4302 |
|
| 4303 | <listitem>
|
| 4304 | <para><varname>NMC</varname> is the count of wrong responses which
|
| 4305 | have been checked.</para>
|
| 4306 | </listitem>
|
| 4307 |
|
| 4308 | <listitem>
|
| 4309 | <para><varname>IS</varname> is set to 1 if the question is simple
|
| 4310 | and 0 if not.</para>
|
| 4311 | </listitem>
|
| 4312 |
|
| 4313 | <listitem>
|
| 4314 | <para><varname>IMULT</varname> is set to 1 if the question is
|
| 4315 | multiple and 0 if not.</para>
|
| 4316 | </listitem>
|
| 4317 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4318 | </sect3>
|
| 4319 |
|
| 4320 | <sect3 id="scoring-result">
|
| 4321 | <title>From scoring strategy to students marks</title>
|
| 4322 |
|
| 4323 | <para>Here is how students' marks are computed: for every
|
| 4324 | student,</para>
|
| 4325 |
|
| 4326 | <orderedlist>
|
| 4327 | <listitem>
|
| 4328 | <para>The scoring strategy is applied for each question in turn,
|
| 4329 | to get the <emphasis>questions scores</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4330 | </listitem>
|
| 4331 |
|
| 4332 | <listitem>
|
| 4333 | <para>All questions (except indicative ones) scores are added to
|
| 4334 | get the student <emphasis>total score</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4335 | </listitem>
|
| 4336 |
|
| 4337 | <listitem>
|
| 4338 | <para>If a positive <emphasis>maximal mark</emphasis> is given as
|
| 4339 | a parameter (in the <guilabel>Project</guilabel> tab of the
|
| 4340 | <menuchoice>
|
| 4341 | <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
| 4342 |
|
| 4343 | <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
|
| 4344 | </menuchoice> window), the total score of the student is divided
|
| 4345 | by the <emphasis>maximum total score</emphasis> (which is the
|
| 4346 | total score for a perfect copy), and multiplied by the
|
| 4347 | <emphasis>maximum mark</emphasis>, to get the student's
|
| 4348 | <emphasis>mark</emphasis>. This way, if the student answered
|
| 4349 | perfectly to all questions, his mark will be the maximum mark. If
|
| 4350 | you set the maximum mark to 100, the student's mark can be seen as
|
| 4351 | a percentage of good answers.</para>
|
| 4352 | </listitem>
|
| 4353 | </orderedlist>
|
| 4354 | </sect3>
|
| 4355 | </sect2>
|
| 4356 |
|
| 4357 | <sect2 id="sec.students.id">
|
| 4358 | <title>Identification of the students</title>
|
| 4359 |
|
| 4360 | <para>This stage is not mandatory. It deals with associating each copy
|
| 4361 | with a student. The name of the student is not read in an automated
|
| 4362 | fashion, but two reasonable possibilities are proposed:</para>
|
| 4363 |
|
| 4364 | <orderedlist>
|
| 4365 | <listitem>
|
| 4366 | <para>It is possible to ask students to identify themselves on their
|
| 4367 | copy with their student number, which will be written by checking
|
| 4368 | one box per digit. A LaTeX command is designed to use this method on
|
| 4369 | the copy (see the part <xref linkend="latex.codes"/>). After the
|
| 4370 | exam, copies will be identified automatically taking into account a
|
| 4371 | list matching the students' numbers and their names.</para>
|
| 4372 | </listitem>
|
| 4373 |
|
| 4374 | <listitem>
|
| 4375 | <para>With no input of the students' numbers, or in the case when
|
| 4376 | the automated identification has not succeeded perfectly (for
|
| 4377 | example when a student made a wrong input), the graphical interface
|
| 4378 | allows an assisted manual association.</para>
|
| 4379 | </listitem>
|
| 4380 | </orderedlist>
|
| 4381 |
|
| 4382 | <para>Let's first move to the <guilabel>Marking</guilabel> tab of the
|
| 4383 | graphical interface.</para>
|
| 4384 |
|
| 4385 | <sect3 id="liste.etudiants">
|
| 4386 | <title id="liste.etudiants.title">List of the students</title>
|
| 4387 |
|
| 4388 | <para>We must previously supply a list of students. This list can
|
| 4389 | obviously be used for many multiple-choices tests. This list is a CSV
|
| 4390 | file with optional comments lines at the beginning with prefix
|
| 4391 | `<code>#</code>', as in the following example:<programlisting># STUDENTS / 1ST YEAR
|
| 4392 | surname:name:id:email
|
| 4393 | Bienvenüe:Alexis:001:paamc@passoire.fr
|
| 4394 | Boulix:Jojo:002:jojo.boulix@rien.xx
|
| 4395 | Noël:Père:003:pere.noel@pole-nord.xx</programlisting></para>
|
| 4396 |
|
| 4397 | <para>The first lines of the file which begin with the character
|
| 4398 | `<code>#'</code> are comments. The first of the other lines contains
|
| 4399 | (separated by the character <code>`:'</code>) the column titles. Then,
|
| 4400 | with one line per student, we write the corresponding information.
|
| 4401 | There must be at least one column named <code>name</code> or
|
| 4402 | <code>surname</code>.</para>
|
| 4403 |
|
| 4404 | <note>
|
| 4405 | <para>One can replace the separator <code>`:'</code> by a comma, a
|
| 4406 | semicolon or a tabulation. However the same separator must be used
|
| 4407 | everywhere in the file which contains the list of students. The used
|
| 4408 | separator is detected by taking the character (out of the four
|
| 4409 | possible characters) which appears most frequently in the first line
|
| 4410 | which is not a comment.</para>
|
| 4411 |
|
| 4412 | <para>Any CSV file should be suitable.</para>
|
| 4413 | </note>
|
| 4414 |
|
| 4415 | <warning>
|
| 4416 | <para>
|
| 4417 | Type carefully the CSV file to send the same test to multiple recipients.
|
| 4418 | </para>
|
| 4419 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4420 | <listitem>A semi-colon or colon or tabulation to separate the headers and a comma to separate the email adresses.</listitem>
|
| 4421 | <listitem>A comma to separate the headers and email adresses between inverted comma/quotation marks.</listitem>
|
| 4422 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4423 | <programlisting>
|
| 4424 | name,forenama,email
|
| 4425 | Boulix,Jojo,"jojo@boulix.fr,parents@boulix.com"
|
| 4426 | </programlisting>
|
| 4427 | </warning>
|
| 4428 |
|
| 4429 | <para>The prepared list of students will then be selected with the
|
| 4430 | button <guibutton>Set file</guibutton> in the <guilabel>Students
|
| 4431 | identification</guilabel> section. We must also choose one of the
|
| 4432 | columns as a unique key which will identify the students (generally,
|
| 4433 | one chooses the column containing the student's number). Last, to
|
| 4434 | prepare an automated association, we must choose the name of the
|
| 4435 | relevant code used in the LaTeX command <command>AMCcode</command> (if
|
| 4436 | used).</para>
|
| 4437 | </sect3>
|
| 4438 |
|
| 4439 | <sect3>
|
| 4440 | <title>Association</title>
|
| 4441 |
|
| 4442 | <sect4>
|
| 4443 | <title>Automated association</title>
|
| 4444 |
|
| 4445 | <para>When we push the button <guibutton>Automatic</guibutton> in
|
| 4446 | the part <guilabel>Students identification</guilabel>, matching of
|
| 4447 | the codes given by the students begins. We can watch or improve the
|
| 4448 | result later with a (partial) manual association.</para>
|
| 4449 |
|
| 4450 | <warning>
|
| 4451 | <para>To make an automated association, at least one command
|
| 4452 | <command>AMCcode</command> is required (see <xref
|
| 4453 | linkend="latex.codes"/>) in the LaTeX source file, as well as a
|
| 4454 | list of students with a column containing a reference (generally a
|
| 4455 | number of student) which will be identical to the input given in
|
| 4456 | the boxes produced by the command
|
| 4457 | <command>AMCcode</command>.</para>
|
| 4458 | </warning>
|
| 4459 | </sect4>
|
| 4460 |
|
| 4461 | <sect4>
|
| 4462 | <title>Manual association</title>
|
| 4463 |
|
| 4464 | <para>To open the window allowing recognition of the students'
|
| 4465 | names, let's click on <guibutton>Manual</guibutton> button in the
|
| 4466 | <guilabel>Students identification</guilabel> section. This window is
|
| 4467 | made of an upper part which presents in sequence images of the names
|
| 4468 | written by the students, a lower part containing a button for each
|
| 4469 | student from the list we supplied, and a right part allowing to
|
| 4470 | browse easily the copies to be identified. Let's click the button
|
| 4471 | matching the name written in the upper part for each presented page
|
| 4472 | (by default, only the copies not or badly identified are presented -
|
| 4473 | this can be changed by checking the box
|
| 4474 | <guilabel>associated</guilabel>). When every page is read, a blue
|
| 4475 | background appears instead of the names, and we just need to click
|
| 4476 | the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to end with
|
| 4477 | association.</para>
|
| 4478 | </sect4>
|
| 4479 | </sect3>
|
| 4480 | </sect2>
|
| 4481 |
|
| 4482 | <sect2>
|
| 4483 | <title>Exporting the scores list</title>
|
| 4484 |
|
| 4485 | <para>At this stage, we can get the list of scores under various formats
|
| 4486 | (currently CSV and OpenOffice), with the button
|
| 4487 | <guibutton>Export</guibutton>. This export will be followed by the
|
| 4488 | opening of the produced file by the appropriate software (if
|
| 4489 | available).</para>
|
| 4490 |
|
| 4491 | <sect3>
|
| 4492 | <title>Export to ODS (OpenOffice, LibreOffice)</title>
|
| 4493 |
|
| 4494 | <para>In the exported file, the following colors are used:</para>
|
| 4495 |
|
| 4496 | <variablelist>
|
| 4497 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4498 | <term>gray</term>
|
| 4499 |
|
| 4500 | <listitem>
|
| 4501 | <para>is used for <emphasis>non applicable</emphasis>. This may
|
| 4502 | be for example scores for absentees, or scores corresponding to
|
| 4503 | a question that was not shown to the corresponding
|
| 4504 | student.</para>
|
| 4505 | </listitem>
|
| 4506 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4507 |
|
| 4508 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4509 | <term>yellow</term>
|
| 4510 |
|
| 4511 | <listitem>
|
| 4512 | <para>is used for questions that has not been answered by the
|
| 4513 | student.</para>
|
| 4514 | </listitem>
|
| 4515 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4516 |
|
| 4517 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4518 | <term>red</term>
|
| 4519 |
|
| 4520 | <listitem>
|
| 4521 | <para>is used for questions with an <emphasis>invalid</emphasis>
|
| 4522 | answer: the student ticked several boxes in a simple question,
|
| 4523 | or he ticked some boxes <emphasis>and</emphasis> the box
|
| 4524 | <emphasis>None of these answers are correct</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4525 | </listitem>
|
| 4526 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4527 |
|
| 4528 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4529 | <term>purple</term>
|
| 4530 |
|
| 4531 | <listitem>
|
| 4532 | <para>used for indicative questions.</para>
|
| 4533 | </listitem>
|
| 4534 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4535 | </variablelist>
|
| 4536 | </sect3>
|
| 4537 | </sect2>
|
| 4538 |
|
| 4539 | <sect2>
|
| 4540 | <title>Annotation</title>
|
| 4541 |
|
| 4542 | <para>When we push the button <guibutton>Annotate papers</guibutton>,
|
| 4543 | copies annotation will begin: on every scan, the following annotations
|
| 4544 | will be made (these are the default annotations, they can be
|
| 4545 | configured):</para>
|
| 4546 |
|
| 4547 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4548 | <listitem>
|
| 4549 | <para>The boxes wrongly checked by the student will be circled in
|
| 4550 | red;</para>
|
| 4551 | </listitem>
|
| 4552 |
|
| 4553 | <listitem>
|
| 4554 | <para>the non-checked boxes which should have been are checked in
|
| 4555 | red;</para>
|
| 4556 | </listitem>
|
| 4557 |
|
| 4558 | <listitem>
|
| 4559 | <para>the checked boxes which had to be checked are checked in
|
| 4560 | blue;</para>
|
| 4561 | </listitem>
|
| 4562 |
|
| 4563 | <listitem>
|
| 4564 | <para>for each question, obtained and maximal scores are
|
| 4565 | indicated;</para>
|
| 4566 | </listitem>
|
| 4567 |
|
| 4568 | <listitem>
|
| 4569 | <para>the global score of the copy is indicated on the first page of
|
| 4570 | the copy.</para>
|
| 4571 | </listitem>
|
| 4572 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4573 |
|
| 4574 | <para>The text written on the first page of the copies can be configured
|
| 4575 | (<menuchoice>
|
| 4576 | <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
| 4577 |
|
| 4578 | <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
|
| 4579 |
|
| 4580 | <guimenuitem>Annotation</guimenuitem>
|
| 4581 |
|
| 4582 | <guimenuitem>Header</guimenuitem>
|
| 4583 | </menuchoice> or <menuchoice>
|
| 4584 | <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
|
| 4585 |
|
| 4586 | <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
|
| 4587 |
|
| 4588 | <guimenuitem>Project</guimenuitem>
|
| 4589 |
|
| 4590 | <guimenuitem>Papers annotation</guimenuitem>
|
| 4591 |
|
| 4592 | <guimenuitem>Header text</guimenuitem>
|
| 4593 | </menuchoice>). Substitutions will be made within the provided text
|
| 4594 | (please have a look at <xref linkend="scoring-result"/> for some details
|
| 4595 | on the meaning of those values):</para>
|
| 4596 |
|
| 4597 | <variablelist>
|
| 4598 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4599 | <term><literal>%S</literal></term>
|
| 4600 |
|
| 4601 | <listitem>
|
| 4602 | <para>is replaced by the student's <emphasis>total
|
| 4603 | score</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4604 | </listitem>
|
| 4605 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4606 |
|
| 4607 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4608 | <term><literal>%M</literal></term>
|
| 4609 |
|
| 4610 | <listitem>
|
| 4611 | <para>is replaced by the <emphasis>maximum total
|
| 4612 | score</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4613 | </listitem>
|
| 4614 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4615 |
|
| 4616 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4617 | <term><literal>%s</literal></term>
|
| 4618 |
|
| 4619 | <listitem>
|
| 4620 | <para>is replaced by the student's
|
| 4621 | <emphasis>mark</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4622 | </listitem>
|
| 4623 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4624 |
|
| 4625 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4626 | <term><literal>%m</literal></term>
|
| 4627 |
|
| 4628 | <listitem>
|
| 4629 | <para>is replaced by the <emphasis>maximum mark</emphasis>.</para>
|
| 4630 | </listitem>
|
| 4631 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4632 |
|
| 4633 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4634 | <term><literal>%(ID)</literal></term>
|
| 4635 |
|
| 4636 | <listitem>
|
| 4637 | <para>is replaced by the student's name.</para>
|
| 4638 | </listitem>
|
| 4639 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4640 |
|
| 4641 | <varlistentry>
|
| 4642 | <term><literal>%(<replaceable>COL</replaceable>)</literal></term>
|
| 4643 |
|
| 4644 | <listitem>
|
| 4645 | <para>is replaced by the value of column
|
| 4646 | <replaceable>COL</replaceable> in the students list for the
|
| 4647 | current student.</para>
|
| 4648 | </listitem>
|
| 4649 | </varlistentry>
|
| 4650 | </variablelist>
|
| 4651 |
|
| 4652 | <para>This operation is made for each page, giving as a result PDF
|
| 4653 | annotated papers. The name of the PDF file which will contain the
|
| 4654 | corrected copy of a student is based on the template indicated in the
|
| 4655 | field <guilabel>File name model</guilabel>. In that template, every
|
| 4656 | substring as « (<replaceable>col</replaceable>) » is replaced by the
|
| 4657 | contents of the column named <code><replaceable>col</replaceable></code>
|
| 4658 | in the file containing the list of students (see section <xref
|
| 4659 | endterm="liste.etudiants.title" linkend="liste.etudiants"/>). If we let
|
| 4660 | this field empty, a default value is built up based on the student's
|
| 4661 | name and student number.</para>
|
| 4662 |
|
| 4663 | <sect3 id="marks.position">
|
| 4664 | <title id="marks.position.title">Marks' position</title>
|
| 4665 |
|
| 4666 | <para>You may choose marks's position with the menu <menuchoice>
|
| 4667 | <guimenu>Edition</guimenu>
|
| 4668 |
|
| 4669 | <guimenuitem>Preference</guimenuitem>
|
| 4670 |
|
| 4671 | <guimenuitem>Project</guimenuitem>
|
| 4672 |
|
| 4673 | <guimenuitem>Marks position</guimenuitem>
|
| 4674 | </menuchoice></para>
|
| 4675 |
|
| 4676 | <para>Default choices</para>
|
| 4677 |
|
| 4678 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4679 | <listitem>
|
| 4680 | (none)
|
| 4681 | </listitem>
|
| 4682 |
|
| 4683 | <listitem>
|
| 4684 | In the margin.
|
| 4685 | </listitem>
|
| 4686 |
|
| 4687 | <listitem>
|
| 4688 | In the both margins
|
| 4689 | </listitem>
|
| 4690 |
|
| 4691 | <listitem>
|
| 4692 | Beside the boxes.
|
| 4693 | </listitem>
|
| 4694 |
|
| 4695 | <listitem>
|
| 4696 | Where defined in the source (see
|
| 4697 |
|
| 4698 | <xref endterm="marks.display.area.title"
|
| 4699 | linkend="marks.display.area"/>
|
| 4700 |
|
| 4701 | ).
|
| 4702 | </listitem>
|
| 4703 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4704 | </sect3>
|
| 4705 | </sect2>
|
| 4706 | </sect1>
|
| 4707 |
|
| 4708 | <sect1>
|
| 4709 | <title>Alternative usages</title>
|
| 4710 |
|
| 4711 | <sect2>
|
| 4712 | <title>Photocopied subject</title>
|
| 4713 |
|
| 4714 | <para>As explained in <xref endterm="printing.title"
|
| 4715 | linkend="printing"/>, it is not always possible to photocopy one answer
|
| 4716 | sheet to give to several students. However, when using a separate answer
|
| 4717 | sheet and when questions and answers are not to be shuffled, you can
|
| 4718 | photocopy the subject, and print all the answer sheets separately. We
|
| 4719 | detail here the proper way to follow.</para>
|
| 4720 |
|
| 4721 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4722 | <listitem>
|
| 4723 | <para>Use <option>separateanswersheet</option> package option (see
|
| 4724 | <xref endterm="sec.package.options.title"
|
| 4725 | linkend="sec.package.options"/>).</para>
|
| 4726 | </listitem>
|
| 4727 |
|
| 4728 | <listitem>
|
| 4729 | <para>Write the subject before calling <command>onecopy</command>
|
| 4730 | command or outside <command>examcopy</command> environment.</para>
|
| 4731 | </listitem>
|
| 4732 |
|
| 4733 | <listitem>
|
| 4734 | <para>Use <command>\AMCformS</command> to output answer boxes in
|
| 4735 | each answer sheet, inside
|
| 4736 | <command>onecopy</command>/<command>examcopy</command>.</para>
|
| 4737 | </listitem>
|
| 4738 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4739 |
|
| 4740 | <para>Here is a minimal example:</para>
|
| 4741 |
|
| 4742 | <programlisting>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 4743 | \usepackage[separateanswersheet]{automultiplechoice}
|
| 4744 | \begin{document}
|
| 4745 |
|
| 4746 | \noindent{\bf Subject}
|
| 4747 |
|
| 4748 | \begin{question}{sum}
|
| 4749 | How much are one plus one?
|
| 4750 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4751 | \wrongchoice{1}
|
| 4752 | \correctchoice{2}
|
| 4753 | \wrongchoice{3}
|
| 4754 | \end{choices}
|
| 4755 | \end{question}
|
| 4756 |
|
| 4757 | \begin{question}{k2}
|
| 4758 | How high is the K2?
|
| 4759 | \begin{choices}
|
| 4760 | \wrongchoice{around 8000m}
|
| 4761 | \correctchoice{around 8600m}
|
| 4762 | \wrongchoice{around 9000m}
|
| 4763 | \end{choices}
|
| 4764 | \end{question}
|
| 4765 |
|
| 4766 | \AMCcleardoublepage
|
| 4767 |
|
| 4768 | \onecopy{5}{
|
| 4769 |
|
| 4770 | \AMCformBegin
|
| 4771 |
|
| 4772 | {\large\bf Answer sheet:}
|
| 4773 | \hfill \namefield{\fbox{
|
| 4774 | \begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 4775 | Name:
|
| 4776 |
|
| 4777 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 4778 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 4779 | \end{minipage}
|
| 4780 | }}
|
| 4781 |
|
| 4782 | \AMCformS
|
| 4783 |
|
| 4784 | }
|
| 4785 |
|
| 4786 | \end{document}
|
| 4787 | </programlisting>
|
| 4788 |
|
| 4789 | <para>You will get from this LaTeX file one subject (sheet numbered 0)
|
| 4790 | to print and photocopy to all students, and several answer sheets to
|
| 4791 | print (one for each student).</para>
|
| 4792 | </sect2>
|
| 4793 |
|
| 4794 | <sect2 id="postcorrect">
|
| 4795 | <title>Post correcting</title>
|
| 4796 |
|
| 4797 | <para>Suppose you want to use a single generic answer sheet for all your
|
| 4798 | exams. You simply print answer boxes on it (say 5 for each questions,
|
| 4799 | and 40 questions), and give the students a subject that you wrote
|
| 4800 | somewhere else. The point here is that the correct choices are not
|
| 4801 | pointed out in the LaTeX file, so that AMC does not know about them. The
|
| 4802 | solution is to give one answer sheet to the teacher to fill correct
|
| 4803 | choices. Then, after scanning and AMC analysis, you simply have to tell
|
| 4804 | AMC which is the teacher completed answer sheet.</para>
|
| 4805 |
|
| 4806 | <para>To implement this idea, follow these rules:</para>
|
| 4807 |
|
| 4808 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4809 | <listitem>
|
| 4810 | <para>Use <option>postcorrect</option>, <option>insidebox</option>
|
| 4811 | and <option>noshuffle</option> package options (see <xref
|
| 4812 | endterm="sec.package.options.title"
|
| 4813 | linkend="sec.package.options"/>).</para>
|
| 4814 | </listitem>
|
| 4815 |
|
| 4816 | <listitem>
|
| 4817 | <para>Only use <command>\wrongchoice</command> for all your choices
|
| 4818 | (never <command>\correctchoice</command>).</para>
|
| 4819 | </listitem>
|
| 4820 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 4821 |
|
| 4822 | <para>Here is a minimal example:</para>
|
| 4823 |
|
| 4824 | <programlisting>\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
|
| 4825 | \usepackage{multicol}
|
| 4826 | \usepackage[insidebox,noshuffle,postcorrect]{automultiplechoice}
|
| 4827 |
|
| 4828 | \begin{document}
|
| 4829 |
|
| 4830 | \onecopy{5}{
|
| 4831 |
|
| 4832 | \noindent
|
| 4833 | \begin{tabular}{|l|l|l|}
|
| 4834 | \hline
|
| 4835 | student number & class & subject\\
|
| 4836 | \hline
|
| 4837 | \vspace{-0.25cm}
|
| 4838 | & &\\
|
| 4839 | \AMCcode{StudentNum}{10}&
|
| 4840 | \AMCcode{class}{2}&
|
| 4841 | \AMCcode{subject}{3}
|
| 4842 | \\
|
| 4843 | \hline
|
| 4844 | \end{tabular}
|
| 4845 | \hfill\namefield{\fbox{
|
| 4846 | \begin{minipage}{.25\linewidth}
|
| 4847 | Name:
|
| 4848 |
|
| 4849 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 4850 |
|
| 4851 | \vspace*{.5cm}\dotfill
|
| 4852 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 4853 | \end{minipage}
|
| 4854 | }}\hfill
|
| 4855 |
|
| 4856 |
|
| 4857 | \vspace{.5cm}
|
| 4858 | \noindent\hrulefill
|
| 4859 |
|
| 4860 | \begin{multicols}{2}\columnseprule=.4pt
|
| 4861 |
|
| 4862 | \begin{question}{01}
|
| 4863 | \begin{choicescustom}
|
| 4864 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4865 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4866 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4867 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4868 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4869 | \end{choicescustom}
|
| 4870 | \end{question}
|
| 4871 |
|
| 4872 | \begin{question}{02}
|
| 4873 | \begin{choicescustom}
|
| 4874 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4875 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4876 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4877 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4878 | \wrongchoice{}%
|
| 4879 | \end{choicescustom}
|
| 4880 | \end{question}
|
| 4881 |
|
| 4882 | % continue here to get as many questions as needed...
|
| 4883 |
|
| 4884 | \end{multicols}
|
| 4885 |
|
| 4886 | }
|
| 4887 |
|
| 4888 | \end{document}
|
| 4889 | </programlisting>
|
| 4890 |
|
| 4891 | <para>You can then process the LaTeX file in AMC, print the sheets, scan
|
| 4892 | them after the exam, and start AMC automatic data capture (including the
|
| 4893 | teacher sheet). When you click on <guibutton>Mark</guibutton> in the
|
| 4894 | <guilabel>Marking</guilabel> tab, letting <guilabel>Update marking
|
| 4895 | scale</guilabel> ticked, you will be prompted for the teacher answer
|
| 4896 | sheet number. You can then continue as usual.</para>
|
| 4897 |
|
| 4898 | <note>
|
| 4899 | <para>You can also write the letters outside the boxes: replace the
|
| 4900 | <option>insidebox</option> option with <option>outsidebox</option>,
|
| 4901 | and write your questions in the following way:</para>
|
| 4902 |
|
| 4903 | <programlisting>\begin{question}{01}
|
| 4904 | \begin{choicescustom}
|
| 4905 | \wrongchoice{A }%
|
| 4906 | \wrongchoice{B }%
|
| 4907 | \wrongchoice{C }%
|
| 4908 | \wrongchoice{D }%
|
| 4909 | \wrongchoice{E }%
|
| 4910 | \end{choicescustom}
|
| 4911 | \end{question}
|
| 4912 | </programlisting>
|
| 4913 | </note>
|
| 4914 | </sect2>
|
| 4915 |
|
| 4916 | <sect2>
|
| 4917 | <title>Nominative sheets</title>
|
| 4918 |
|
| 4919 | <para>In some situations, it can be useful to prepare nominative sheets
|
| 4920 | for all students, from a list of students. Let us see how this can be
|
| 4921 | done.</para>
|
| 4922 |
|
| 4923 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 4924 | <listitem>
|
| 4925 | <para>The students list has to be a CSV list. Suppose in the
|
| 4926 | following that the file students.csv, in the project directory, is
|
| 4927 | UTF8 encoded and that its content is like the following:</para>
|
| 4928 |
|
| 4929 | <programlisting>name,forename,id
|
| 4930 | Boulix,Jojo,001
|
| 4931 | Golin,André,002
|
| 4932 | Moniuszko,Stanisław,003</programlisting>
|
| 4933 |
|
| 4934 | <warning><para>
|
| 4935 | Type carefully the CSV file to send the same test to multiple recipients.
|
| 4936 | </para>
|
| 4937 | <itemizedlist><listitem>Headers separated by a semi-colon and email adresses by a comma.</listitem></itemizedlist>
|
| 4938 | <programlisting>
|
| 4939 | name;surname;id;email
|
| 4940 | Boulix;Jojo;001;jojo@boulix.fr,parents@boulix.com
|
| 4941 | Golin;André;002;andre_golin@truc.fr,papa.golin@rouge.fr,mamangolin@rouge.com
|
| 4942 | Moniuszko;Stanisław;003</programlisting>
|
| 4943 | </warning>
|
| 4944 |
|
| 4945 | </listitem>
|
| 4946 |
|
| 4947 | <warning>
|
| 4948 | <para>Do not use _ (underscore) with the student's name or forename. A compilation error will be display.</para>
|
| 4949 | </warning>
|
| 4950 |
|
| 4951 | <listitem>
|
| 4952 | <para>The LaTeX source file has to load csvsimple package,
|
| 4953 | with:</para>
|
| 4954 |
|
| 4955 | <programlisting>\usepackage{csvsimple}</programlisting>
|
| 4956 | </listitem>
|
| 4957 |
|
| 4958 | <listitem>
|
| 4959 | <para>In the LaTeX source file, define the subject as a command that
|
| 4960 | produce a single subject. This command will be called once for each
|
| 4961 | student by <command>\csvreader</command> (suppose here that the
|
| 4962 | questions has already be defined and included in a group named
|
| 4963 | <code>general</code>):</para>
|
| 4964 |
|
| 4965 | <programlisting>\newcommand{\subject}{
|
| 4966 | \onecopy{1}{
|
| 4967 |
|
| 4968 | \noindent{\bf AutoMultipleChoice \hfill TEST}
|
| 4969 |
|
| 4970 | \vspace*{.5cm}
|
| 4971 |
|
| 4972 | \begin{center}\em
|
| 4973 | Pre-filled test.
|
| 4974 | \end{center}
|
| 4975 |
|
| 4976 | \hfill \namefield{\fbox{
|
| 4977 | \begin{minipage}{.5\linewidth}
|
| 4978 | Name:
|
| 4979 |
|
| 4980 | \Large\bf \name{} \surname{}
|
| 4981 |
|
| 4982 | \vspace*{1mm}
|
| 4983 | \end{minipage}
|
| 4984 | }}
|
| 4985 |
|
| 4986 | \noindent\hrulefill
|
| 4987 |
|
| 4988 | \vspace{1ex}
|
| 4989 |
|
| 4990 | \shufflegroup{general}
|
| 4991 | \insertgroup{general}
|
| 4992 |
|
| 4993 | \AMCassociation{\id}
|
| 4994 | }
|
| 4995 | }
|
| 4996 |
|
| 4997 | \csvreader[head to column names]{students.csv}{}{\subject}<co id="separator.comma" linkends="separator.comma.exp"/>
|
| 4998 | %\csvreader[head to column names,separator=semicolon]{liste.csv}{}{\subject}<co id="separator.semicolon" linkends="separator.semicolon.exp"/>
|
| 4999 |
|
| 5000 | </programlisting>
|
| 5001 |
|
| 5002 | <para>The head to column names option for
|
| 5003 | <command>\csvreader</command> defines commands
|
| 5004 | <command>\name</command>, <command>\surname</command> and
|
| 5005 | <command>\id</command> (named from the CSV headers), that can be
|
| 5006 | used inside <command>\subject</command>. The
|
| 5007 | <command>\AMCassociation</command> call tells AMC to associate the
|
| 5008 | current sheet to student with id <command>\id</command>.</para>
|
| 5009 | <para>
|
| 5010 | <calloutlist>
|
| 5011 | <callout arearefs="separator.comma" id="separator.comma.exp">
|
| 5012 | <para>
|
| 5013 | Use this command if the CSV file contains only one email address per student.
|
| 5014 | </para>
|
| 5015 | </callout>
|
| 5016 |
|
| 5017 | <callout arearefs="separator.semicolon" id="separator.semicolon.exp">
|
| 5018 | <para>
|
| 5019 | Use this command if the CSV file contains multiple email addresses per student.
|
| 5020 | </para>
|
| 5021 | </callout>
|
| 5022 | </calloutlist>
|
| 5023 | </para>
|
| 5024 | </listitem>
|
| 5025 |
|
| 5026 | <listitem>
|
| 5027 | <para>After printing, scanning, data capture and marking, when
|
| 5028 | associating copies with students, choose value
|
| 5029 | "<emphasis>pre-association</emphasis>" for field "code-name for
|
| 5030 | automatic association", and "<emphasis>id</emphasis>" for field
|
| 5031 | "Primary key".</para>
|
| 5032 | </listitem>
|
| 5033 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 5034 | </sect2>
|
| 5035 | </sect1>
|
| 5036 |
|
| 5037 | <sect1 id="commands">
|
| 5038 | <title>Commands manual</title>
|
| 5039 |
|
| 5040 | <para>You may skip this part if you want to use only the graphical user
|
| 5041 | interface (and that should usually be the case). However, every action
|
| 5042 | carried out with the graphical interface can also be performed using the
|
| 5043 | various commands whose syntax is described here.</para>
|
| 5044 |
|
| 5045 | <refentry id="auto-multiple-choice">
|
| 5046 | <refmeta>
|
| 5047 | <refentrytitle>auto-multiple-choice</refentrytitle>
|
| 5048 |
|
| 5049 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5050 |
|
| 5051 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5052 |
|
| 5053 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5054 | </refmeta>
|
| 5055 |
|
| 5056 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5057 | <refname>auto-multiple-choice</refname>
|
| 5058 |
|
| 5059 | <refpurpose>Automated treatment of MCQs</refpurpose>
|
| 5060 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5061 |
|
| 5062 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5063 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5064 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5065 |
|
| 5066 | <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>action</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5067 |
|
| 5068 | <arg rep="repeat">arguments</arg>
|
| 5069 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5070 |
|
| 5071 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5072 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5073 |
|
| 5074 | <arg>project</arg>
|
| 5075 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5076 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5077 |
|
| 5078 | <refsect1>
|
| 5079 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5080 |
|
| 5081 | <para>The <command>auto-multiple-choice</command> command transmits
|
| 5082 | its arguments to the
|
| 5083 | <command>AMC-<replaceable>action</replaceable>.pl</command>
|
| 5084 | command.</para>
|
| 5085 |
|
| 5086 | <para>The second form, which does not mention any action, calls the
|
| 5087 | graphical interface <command>AMC-gui.pl</command>, possibly with the
|
| 5088 | name of a project to be opened.</para>
|
| 5089 | </refsect1>
|
| 5090 |
|
| 5091 | <refsect1>
|
| 5092 | <title>See also</title>
|
| 5093 |
|
| 5094 | <para>Different AMC actions: <citerefentry>
|
| 5095 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 5096 |
|
| 5097 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5098 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5099 | <refentrytitle>AMC-imprime</refentrytitle>
|
| 5100 |
|
| 5101 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5102 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5103 | <refentrytitle>AMC-analyse</refentrytitle>
|
| 5104 |
|
| 5105 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5106 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5107 | <refentrytitle>AMC-note</refentrytitle>
|
| 5108 |
|
| 5109 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5110 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5111 | <refentrytitle>AMC-association-auto</refentrytitle>
|
| 5112 |
|
| 5113 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5114 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5115 | <refentrytitle>AMC-export</refentrytitle>
|
| 5116 |
|
| 5117 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5118 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5119 | <refentrytitle>AMC-annotate</refentrytitle>
|
| 5120 |
|
| 5121 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5122 | </citerefentry>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5123 | <refentrytitle>AMC-regroupe</refentrytitle>
|
| 5124 |
|
| 5125 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5126 | </citerefentry>.</para>
|
| 5127 | </refsect1>
|
| 5128 | </refentry>
|
| 5129 |
|
| 5130 | <refentry id="AMC-prepare">
|
| 5131 | <refmeta>
|
| 5132 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 5133 |
|
| 5134 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5135 |
|
| 5136 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5137 |
|
| 5138 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5139 | </refmeta>
|
| 5140 |
|
| 5141 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5142 | <refname>AMC-prepare</refname>
|
| 5143 |
|
| 5144 | <refpurpose>prepares working documents from LaTeX source
|
| 5145 | file</refpurpose>
|
| 5146 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5147 |
|
| 5148 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5149 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5150 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5151 |
|
| 5152 | <arg choice="plain">prepare</arg>
|
| 5153 |
|
| 5154 | <arg choice="plain">--mode s</arg>
|
| 5155 |
|
| 5156 | <arg choice="plain">--prefix
|
| 5157 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5158 |
|
| 5159 | <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>mcq-source-file</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5160 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5161 |
|
| 5162 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5163 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5164 |
|
| 5165 | <arg choice="plain">prepare</arg>
|
| 5166 |
|
| 5167 | <arg choice="plain">--mode b</arg>
|
| 5168 |
|
| 5169 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 5170 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5171 |
|
| 5172 | <arg choice="plain"><replaceable>mcq-source-file</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5173 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5174 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5175 |
|
| 5176 | <refsect1>
|
| 5177 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5178 |
|
| 5179 | <para>The <command>AMC-prepare.pl</command> command extracts working
|
| 5180 | documents from the source file describing the multiple choice
|
| 5181 | questionnaire. Information to be extracted depends on the
|
| 5182 | <option>--mode</option> argument value. In any mode, the source
|
| 5183 | filename must be given as an argument.</para>
|
| 5184 |
|
| 5185 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 5186 | <listitem>
|
| 5187 | <para>with "<option>--mode s</option>",
|
| 5188 | <command>AMC-prepare.pl</command> makes the subject file (answer
|
| 5189 | sheet to be printed and given to the students), the correction
|
| 5190 | (single corrected answer sheet) and the positions file (file
|
| 5191 | containing information about the positions of the boxes on the
|
| 5192 | pages). The following arguments can be used:</para>
|
| 5193 |
|
| 5194 | <variablelist>
|
| 5195 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5196 | <term><option>--out-sujet
|
| 5197 | <replaceable>subject.pdf</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5198 |
|
| 5199 | <listitem>
|
| 5200 | <para>sets the subject file to build.</para>
|
| 5201 | </listitem>
|
| 5202 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5203 |
|
| 5204 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5205 | <term><option>--out-corrige
|
| 5206 | <replaceable>corrected.pdf</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5207 |
|
| 5208 | <listitem>
|
| 5209 | <para>sets the correction to build.</para>
|
| 5210 | </listitem>
|
| 5211 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5212 |
|
| 5213 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5214 | <term><option>--out-calage
|
| 5215 | <replaceable>calage.xy</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5216 |
|
| 5217 | <listitem>
|
| 5218 | <para>sets the positions file to build.</para>
|
| 5219 | </listitem>
|
| 5220 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5221 |
|
| 5222 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5223 | <term><option>--prefix
|
| 5224 | <replaceable>directory</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5225 |
|
| 5226 | <listitem>
|
| 5227 | <para>this directory is only necessary if one or more of the
|
| 5228 | three previous options are not used: default values are then
|
| 5229 | <filename><replaceable>directory</replaceable>/sujet.pdf</filename>,
|
| 5230 | <filename><replaceable>directory</replaceable>/corrige.pdf</filename>
|
| 5231 | and
|
| 5232 | <filename><replaceable>directory</replaceable>/calage.xy</filename>.</para>
|
| 5233 | </listitem>
|
| 5234 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5235 | </variablelist>
|
| 5236 | </listitem>
|
| 5237 |
|
| 5238 | <listitem>
|
| 5239 | <para>with "<option>--mode b</option>",
|
| 5240 | <command>AMC-prepare.pl</command> extracts scoring data from the
|
| 5241 | source file. In this mode, the <option>--data</option> argument
|
| 5242 | must be used (see below).</para>
|
| 5243 | </listitem>
|
| 5244 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 5245 |
|
| 5246 | <para>The following optional arguments can be used in any mode:</para>
|
| 5247 |
|
| 5248 | <variablelist>
|
| 5249 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5250 | <term><option>--with
|
| 5251 | <replaceable>latex-engine</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5252 |
|
| 5253 | <listitem>
|
| 5254 | <para>gives the LaTeX engine (command) to be used.
|
| 5255 | <replaceable>latex-engine</replaceable> can be
|
| 5256 | <command>pdflatex</command> or <command>xelatex</command> for
|
| 5257 | example.</para>
|
| 5258 | </listitem>
|
| 5259 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5260 |
|
| 5261 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5262 | <term><option>--filter
|
| 5263 | <replaceable>filter</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5264 |
|
| 5265 | <listitem>
|
| 5266 | <para>sets the filter name to transform the MCQ source file into
|
| 5267 | a LaTeX file. Native filters are <code>latex</code> (no change
|
| 5268 | at all) and <code>plain</code> (source is an AMC-TXT
|
| 5269 | file).</para>
|
| 5270 | </listitem>
|
| 5271 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5272 |
|
| 5273 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5274 | <term><option>--filtered-source
|
| 5275 | <replaceable>mcq-latex-file</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5276 |
|
| 5277 | <listitem>
|
| 5278 | <para>gives the LaTeX file to make from the source file using
|
| 5279 | specified filter. If omitted, a filename derived from
|
| 5280 | <replaceable>mcq-source-file</replaceable> adding
|
| 5281 | <filename>_filtered.tex</filename> is used.</para>
|
| 5282 | </listitem>
|
| 5283 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5284 |
|
| 5285 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5286 | <term><option>--n-copies
|
| 5287 | <replaceable>n</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5288 |
|
| 5289 | <listitem>
|
| 5290 | <para>sets the number of copies to produce, overriding the
|
| 5291 | number given in the LaTeX source file (first argument of the
|
| 5292 | <command>\onecopy</command> command).</para>
|
| 5293 | </listitem>
|
| 5294 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5295 |
|
| 5296 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5297 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 5298 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5299 |
|
| 5300 | <listitem>
|
| 5301 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 5302 | </listitem>
|
| 5303 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5304 |
|
| 5305 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5306 | <term><option>--data
|
| 5307 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5308 |
|
| 5309 | <listitem>
|
| 5310 | <para>sets the directory where the project's SQLite data files
|
| 5311 | are.</para>
|
| 5312 | </listitem>
|
| 5313 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5314 | </variablelist>
|
| 5315 | </refsect1>
|
| 5316 | </refentry>
|
| 5317 |
|
| 5318 | <refentry>
|
| 5319 | <refmeta>
|
| 5320 | <refentrytitle>AMC-meptex</refentrytitle>
|
| 5321 |
|
| 5322 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5323 |
|
| 5324 | <refmiscinfo>Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5325 |
|
| 5326 | <refmiscinfo>@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5327 | </refmeta>
|
| 5328 |
|
| 5329 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5330 | <refname>AMC-meptex</refname>
|
| 5331 |
|
| 5332 | <refpurpose>gets the layout information from the working document to
|
| 5333 | the layout database</refpurpose>
|
| 5334 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5335 |
|
| 5336 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5337 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5338 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5339 |
|
| 5340 | <arg choice="plain">meptex</arg>
|
| 5341 |
|
| 5342 | <arg choice="plain">--src <replaceable>calage.xy</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5343 |
|
| 5344 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 5345 | <replaceable>directory</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5346 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5347 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5348 |
|
| 5349 | <refsect1>
|
| 5350 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5351 |
|
| 5352 | <para>The <command>AMC-meptex.pl</command> command extracts the layout
|
| 5353 | information (exact positions of the boxes, the marks, the name field
|
| 5354 | on all the pages) from a working document
|
| 5355 | <replaceable>calage.xy</replaceable> and fills the layout database (a
|
| 5356 | SQLite file) in the data directory
|
| 5357 | <replaceable>directory</replaceable>.</para>
|
| 5358 | </refsect1>
|
| 5359 | </refentry>
|
| 5360 |
|
| 5361 | <refentry id="AMC-imprime">
|
| 5362 | <refmeta>
|
| 5363 | <refentrytitle>AMC-imprime</refentrytitle>
|
| 5364 |
|
| 5365 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5366 |
|
| 5367 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5368 |
|
| 5369 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5370 | </refmeta>
|
| 5371 |
|
| 5372 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5373 | <refname>AMC-imprime</refname>
|
| 5374 |
|
| 5375 | <refpurpose>prints AMC multiple choice answer sheets to be distributed
|
| 5376 | to the students</refpurpose>
|
| 5377 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5378 |
|
| 5379 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5380 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5381 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5382 |
|
| 5383 | <arg choice="plain">imprime</arg>
|
| 5384 |
|
| 5385 | <arg choice="plain">--sujet
|
| 5386 | <replaceable>subject.pdf</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5387 |
|
| 5388 | <arg choice="plain">--fich-nums
|
| 5389 | <replaceable>numbers-file.txt</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5390 |
|
| 5391 | <arg choice="plain">--data <replaceable>data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5392 |
|
| 5393 | <arg choice="plain">--methode
|
| 5394 | <replaceable>method</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5395 |
|
| 5396 | <arg rep="repeat">where-to-print-arguments</arg>
|
| 5397 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5398 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5399 |
|
| 5400 | <refsect1>
|
| 5401 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5402 |
|
| 5403 | <para>The <command>AMC-imprime.pl</command> command prints selected
|
| 5404 | copies from a AMC multiple choice answer sheet.</para>
|
| 5405 |
|
| 5406 | <refsect2>
|
| 5407 | <title>What to print</title>
|
| 5408 |
|
| 5409 | <para>The following arguments describe what to print:</para>
|
| 5410 |
|
| 5411 | <variablelist>
|
| 5412 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5413 | <term><option>--sujet
|
| 5414 | <replaceable>subject.pdf</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5415 |
|
| 5416 | <listitem>
|
| 5417 | <para>sets the subject file (prepared by <citerefentry>
|
| 5418 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 5419 |
|
| 5420 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5421 | </citerefentry>).</para>
|
| 5422 | </listitem>
|
| 5423 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5424 |
|
| 5425 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5426 | <term><option>--fich-nums
|
| 5427 | <replaceable>numbers-file.txt</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5428 |
|
| 5429 | <listitem>
|
| 5430 | <para>gives a file where the numbers of the copies to be
|
| 5431 | printed are written (one number per line). If this argument is
|
| 5432 | not given, all the copies will be printed.</para>
|
| 5433 | </listitem>
|
| 5434 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5435 |
|
| 5436 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5437 | <term><option>--data
|
| 5438 | <replaceable>data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5439 |
|
| 5440 | <listitem>
|
| 5441 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for
|
| 5442 | example <citerefentry>
|
| 5443 | <refentrytitle>AMC-meptex</refentrytitle>
|
| 5444 |
|
| 5445 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5446 | </citerefentry>). The layout database in the data directory
|
| 5447 | is used to know at which page of the subject file each copy
|
| 5448 | begins and ends.</para>
|
| 5449 | </listitem>
|
| 5450 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5451 |
|
| 5452 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5453 | <term><option>--split</option></term>
|
| 5454 |
|
| 5455 | <listitem>
|
| 5456 | <para>asks to print separate answer sheets separately.</para>
|
| 5457 | </listitem>
|
| 5458 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5459 | </variablelist>
|
| 5460 | </refsect2>
|
| 5461 |
|
| 5462 | <refsect2>
|
| 5463 | <title>Where to print</title>
|
| 5464 |
|
| 5465 | <para>Several printing methods are currently defined:</para>
|
| 5466 |
|
| 5467 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 5468 | <listitem>
|
| 5469 | <para>with "<option>--methode CUPS</option>",
|
| 5470 | <command>AMC-imprime.pl</command> prints to a CUPS printer. One
|
| 5471 | print job is sent for each copy, allowing for example to use
|
| 5472 | stapling. Use the following options with this method:</para>
|
| 5473 |
|
| 5474 | <variablelist>
|
| 5475 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5476 | <term><option>--imprimante
|
| 5477 | <replaceable>printer</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5478 |
|
| 5479 | <listitem>
|
| 5480 | <para>sets the CUPS printer name to print to.</para>
|
| 5481 | </listitem>
|
| 5482 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5483 |
|
| 5484 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5485 | <term><option>--options
|
| 5486 | <replaceable>cups-options</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5487 |
|
| 5488 | <listitem>
|
| 5489 | <para>gives CUPS options, in the
|
| 5490 | <option>opt1=value1,opt2=value2,...</option>
|
| 5491 | format.</para>
|
| 5492 | </listitem>
|
| 5493 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5494 | </variablelist>
|
| 5495 | </listitem>
|
| 5496 |
|
| 5497 | <listitem>
|
| 5498 | <para>with "<option>--methode file</option>",
|
| 5499 | <command>AMC-imprime.pl</command> outputs the answer sheets to
|
| 5500 | files (one for each copy).</para>
|
| 5501 |
|
| 5502 | <variablelist>
|
| 5503 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5504 | <term><option>--output
|
| 5505 | <replaceable>filename</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5506 |
|
| 5507 | <listitem>
|
| 5508 | <para>sets the filename for outputs. The
|
| 5509 | '<literal>%e</literal>' sequence will be replaced by a
|
| 5510 | 4-digits copy number. If
|
| 5511 | <replaceable>filename</replaceable> does not contain
|
| 5512 | '<literal>%e</literal>', the string
|
| 5513 | '<literal>-%e.pdf</literal>' will be added at its
|
| 5514 | end.</para>
|
| 5515 | </listitem>
|
| 5516 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5517 | </variablelist>
|
| 5518 | </listitem>
|
| 5519 |
|
| 5520 | <listitem>
|
| 5521 | <para>with "<option>--methode command</option>",
|
| 5522 | <command>AMC-imprime.pl</command> will use a provided command
|
| 5523 | for each copy.</para>
|
| 5524 |
|
| 5525 | <variablelist>
|
| 5526 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5527 | <term><option>--print-command
|
| 5528 | <replaceable>command</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5529 |
|
| 5530 | <listitem>
|
| 5531 | <para>gives the command to be used for printing. The
|
| 5532 | <replaceable>command</replaceable> string will be split at
|
| 5533 | each space character (even when using quotes...). The
|
| 5534 | sequence '<literal>%f</literal>' will be replaced by a PDF
|
| 5535 | filename (containing the copy to print), and
|
| 5536 | '<literal>%e</literal>' will be replaced by the copy
|
| 5537 | number.</para>
|
| 5538 | </listitem>
|
| 5539 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5540 | </variablelist>
|
| 5541 | </listitem>
|
| 5542 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 5543 | </refsect2>
|
| 5544 |
|
| 5545 | <refsect2>
|
| 5546 | <title>Other options</title>
|
| 5547 |
|
| 5548 | <para>Other available options:</para>
|
| 5549 |
|
| 5550 | <variablelist>
|
| 5551 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5552 | <term>--extract-with <replaceable>command</replaceable></term>
|
| 5553 |
|
| 5554 | <listitem>
|
| 5555 | <para>gives the command to use to extract pages from the PDF
|
| 5556 | subject. Currently only <command>pdftk</command> and
|
| 5557 | <command>gs</command> are available. The default value is
|
| 5558 | <command>pdftk</command>, but <command>gs</command> will be
|
| 5559 | used if the <command>pdftk</command> command is not
|
| 5560 | installed.</para>
|
| 5561 | </listitem>
|
| 5562 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5563 | </variablelist>
|
| 5564 | </refsect2>
|
| 5565 | </refsect1>
|
| 5566 | </refentry>
|
| 5567 |
|
| 5568 | <refentry>
|
| 5569 | <refmeta>
|
| 5570 | <refentrytitle>AMC-getimages</refentrytitle>
|
| 5571 |
|
| 5572 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5573 |
|
| 5574 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5575 |
|
| 5576 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5577 | </refmeta>
|
| 5578 |
|
| 5579 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5580 | <refname>AMC-getimages</refname>
|
| 5581 |
|
| 5582 | <refpurpose>prepares scan images before sending them to <citerefentry>
|
| 5583 | <refentrytitle>AMC-analyse</refentrytitle>
|
| 5584 |
|
| 5585 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5586 | </citerefentry> for analysis</refpurpose>
|
| 5587 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5588 |
|
| 5589 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5590 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5591 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5592 |
|
| 5593 | <arg choice="plain">getimages</arg>
|
| 5594 |
|
| 5595 | <arg choice="opt">--copy-to
|
| 5596 | <replaceable>project-scans-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5597 |
|
| 5598 | <arg>--vector-density <replaceable>density</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5599 |
|
| 5600 | <arg choice="plain">--list
|
| 5601 | <replaceable>list-file</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5602 |
|
| 5603 | <group>
|
| 5604 | <arg choice="plain"
|
| 5605 | rep="repeat"><replaceable>scan-files</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5606 | </group>
|
| 5607 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5608 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5609 |
|
| 5610 | <refsect1>
|
| 5611 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5612 |
|
| 5613 | <para>The <command>AMC-getimages.pl</command> command prepares scan
|
| 5614 | files before sending them to <citerefentry>
|
| 5615 | <refentrytitle>AMC-analyse</refentrytitle>
|
| 5616 |
|
| 5617 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5618 | </citerefentry>:</para>
|
| 5619 |
|
| 5620 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 5621 | <listitem>
|
| 5622 | <para>multipage image files are split to get one file per
|
| 5623 | page.</para>
|
| 5624 | </listitem>
|
| 5625 |
|
| 5626 | <listitem>
|
| 5627 | <para>vector images (such as PDF, EPS) are converted to bitmap
|
| 5628 | images.</para>
|
| 5629 | </listitem>
|
| 5630 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 5631 |
|
| 5632 | <para>The input images can be given either as arguments to
|
| 5633 | AMC-getimages.pl, either as the name of a file which contains all the
|
| 5634 | paths of the scan files.</para>
|
| 5635 |
|
| 5636 | <variablelist>
|
| 5637 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5638 | <term><option>--list
|
| 5639 | <replaceable>list-file</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5640 |
|
| 5641 | <listitem>
|
| 5642 | <para>gives the name of the file that optionally contains (one
|
| 5643 | per line) the paths of the scan files. This file will be cleared
|
| 5644 | and filled with the paths of the scan files after processing, so
|
| 5645 | that the same path can be passed to
|
| 5646 | <command>AMC-analyse.pl</command> as the
|
| 5647 | <option>--list-fichiers</option> option value.</para>
|
| 5648 | </listitem>
|
| 5649 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5650 |
|
| 5651 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5652 | <term><option>--copy-to
|
| 5653 | <replaceable>project-scans-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5654 |
|
| 5655 | <listitem>
|
| 5656 | <para>gives a directory where to copy all the scans
|
| 5657 | files.</para>
|
| 5658 | </listitem>
|
| 5659 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5660 |
|
| 5661 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5662 | <term><option>--vector-density
|
| 5663 | <replaceable>density</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5664 |
|
| 5665 | <listitem>
|
| 5666 | <para>sets the density used to convert vector graphics scans to
|
| 5667 | bitmap files. Defaults to 300.</para>
|
| 5668 | </listitem>
|
| 5669 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5670 | </variablelist>
|
| 5671 | </refsect1>
|
| 5672 | </refentry>
|
| 5673 |
|
| 5674 | <refentry id="AMC-analyse">
|
| 5675 | <refmeta>
|
| 5676 | <refentrytitle>AMC-analyse</refentrytitle>
|
| 5677 |
|
| 5678 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5679 |
|
| 5680 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5681 |
|
| 5682 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5683 | </refmeta>
|
| 5684 |
|
| 5685 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5686 | <refname>AMC-analyse</refname>
|
| 5687 |
|
| 5688 | <refpurpose>automatic data capture from scans for AMC multiple choice
|
| 5689 | exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 5690 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5691 |
|
| 5692 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5693 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5694 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5695 |
|
| 5696 | <arg choice="plain">analyse</arg>
|
| 5697 |
|
| 5698 | <arg choice="plain">--projet
|
| 5699 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5700 |
|
| 5701 | <arg>--seuil-coche <replaceable>threshold</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5702 |
|
| 5703 | <arg>--tol-marque <replaceable>tol</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5704 |
|
| 5705 | <group>
|
| 5706 | <arg choice="plain">--list-fichiers
|
| 5707 | <replaceable>files-list.txt</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5708 |
|
| 5709 | <arg choice="plain"
|
| 5710 | rep="repeat"><replaceable>scan-files</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5711 | </group>
|
| 5712 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5713 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5714 |
|
| 5715 | <refsect1>
|
| 5716 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5717 |
|
| 5718 | <para>The <command>AMC-analyse.pl</command> command performs automatic
|
| 5719 | data capture from scans of completed answer sheets of an AMC multiple
|
| 5720 | choice questionnaire. Before calling
|
| 5721 | <command>AMC-analyse.pl</command>, <citerefentry>
|
| 5722 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 5723 |
|
| 5724 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5725 | </citerefentry> should have been called to make working documents
|
| 5726 | (<option>--mode s</option>) and the layout should have been processed
|
| 5727 | with <citerefentry>
|
| 5728 | <refentrytitle>AMC-meptex</refentrytitle>
|
| 5729 |
|
| 5730 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5731 | </citerefentry>.</para>
|
| 5732 |
|
| 5733 | <variablelist>
|
| 5734 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5735 | <term><option>--data
|
| 5736 | <replaceable>data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5737 |
|
| 5738 | <listitem>
|
| 5739 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for example
|
| 5740 | <citerefentry>
|
| 5741 | <refentrytitle>AMC-meptex</refentrytitle>
|
| 5742 |
|
| 5743 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5744 | </citerefentry>). Defaults to
|
| 5745 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/data</filename>.</para>
|
| 5746 | </listitem>
|
| 5747 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5748 |
|
| 5749 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5750 | <term><option>--cr
|
| 5751 | <replaceable>project-cr-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5752 |
|
| 5753 | <listitem>
|
| 5754 | <para>gives a directory where to create image reports of the
|
| 5755 | data capture (zooms on the boxes in a <filename>zooms</filename>
|
| 5756 | sub-directory, name filed extraction as a
|
| 5757 | <filename>name-*.jpg</filename> file, and layout report as a
|
| 5758 | <filename>page-*.jpg</filename> file).</para>
|
| 5759 | </listitem>
|
| 5760 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5761 |
|
| 5762 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5763 | <term><option>--projet
|
| 5764 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5765 |
|
| 5766 | <listitem>
|
| 5767 | <para>When using this option, if <option>--cr</option> is not
|
| 5768 | used, <replaceable>project-cr-dir</replaceable> will be set to
|
| 5769 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/cr</filename>.</para>
|
| 5770 | </listitem>
|
| 5771 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5772 | </variablelist>
|
| 5773 |
|
| 5774 | <para>Giving the names of the scan files to process can be done in two
|
| 5775 | ways:</para>
|
| 5776 |
|
| 5777 | <itemizedlist>
|
| 5778 | <listitem>
|
| 5779 | <para>these names can be given as arguments,</para>
|
| 5780 | </listitem>
|
| 5781 |
|
| 5782 | <listitem>
|
| 5783 | <para>these names can be written to a plain file (one filename per
|
| 5784 | line), using the <option>--list-fichiers
|
| 5785 | <replaceable>files-list.txt</replaceable></option> to give the
|
| 5786 | name of this file.</para>
|
| 5787 | </listitem>
|
| 5788 | </itemizedlist>
|
| 5789 |
|
| 5790 | <para>Some parameters for data capture may be set using the following
|
| 5791 | options:</para>
|
| 5792 |
|
| 5793 | <variablelist>
|
| 5794 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5795 | <term><option>--prop
|
| 5796 | <replaceable>proportion</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5797 |
|
| 5798 | <listitem>
|
| 5799 | <para>sets the proportion of each box that will be measured to
|
| 5800 | decide if the box is ticked or not. Default value is 0.8.</para>
|
| 5801 | </listitem>
|
| 5802 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5803 |
|
| 5804 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5805 | <term><option>--bw-threshold
|
| 5806 | <replaceable>threshold</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5807 |
|
| 5808 | <listitem>
|
| 5809 | <para>This parameter is used when converting the grayscale scan
|
| 5810 | file to black and white. To get more black pixels, use a greater
|
| 5811 | value. To get more white pixels, use a smaller value. The
|
| 5812 | threshold must be between 0 and 1. The default value is
|
| 5813 | 0.6.</para>
|
| 5814 | </listitem>
|
| 5815 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5816 |
|
| 5817 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5818 | <term><option>--ignore-red</option></term>
|
| 5819 |
|
| 5820 | <listitem>
|
| 5821 | <para>With this option, only red channel will be used from color
|
| 5822 | scans. This way, all that is written in red will be ignored in
|
| 5823 | the scan. This can be useful when the boxes are printed in
|
| 5824 | red.</para>
|
| 5825 | </listitem>
|
| 5826 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5827 |
|
| 5828 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5829 | <term><option>--tol-marque
|
| 5830 | <replaceable>tol</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5831 |
|
| 5832 | <listitem>
|
| 5833 | <para>defines the tolerance when detecting the four marks in the
|
| 5834 | scans corners. These marks are detected looking for black
|
| 5835 | connected components which dimensions are
|
| 5836 | <emphasis>closed</emphasis> to the target dimension
|
| 5837 | <replaceable>target</replaceable> (exact dimensions of the marks
|
| 5838 | if printing/scanning process where perfectly accurate). If
|
| 5839 | <replaceable>tol</replaceable> is a real number, accepted
|
| 5840 | dimensions are those between
|
| 5841 | (1-<replaceable>tol</replaceable>)*<replaceable>target</replaceable>
|
| 5842 | and
|
| 5843 | (1+<replaceable>tol</replaceable>)*<replaceable>target</replaceable>.
|
| 5844 | If <replaceable>tol</replaceable> is
|
| 5845 | "<replaceable>tinf</replaceable>,<replaceable>tsup</replaceable>"
|
| 5846 | (where <replaceable>tinf</replaceable> and
|
| 5847 | <replaceable>tsup</replaceable> are real numbers), accepted
|
| 5848 | dimensions are those between
|
| 5849 | (1-<replaceable>tinf</replaceable>)*<replaceable>target</replaceable>
|
| 5850 | and
|
| 5851 | (1+<replaceable>tsup</replaceable>)*<replaceable>target</replaceable>.
|
| 5852 | A standard value is 0.2.</para>
|
| 5853 | </listitem>
|
| 5854 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5855 |
|
| 5856 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5857 | <term><option>--multiple</option></term>
|
| 5858 |
|
| 5859 | <listitem>
|
| 5860 | <para>This option is to be used when the scans are photocopies
|
| 5861 | from some subjects (different students can have the same
|
| 5862 | subject). In this case, <emphasis>copy</emphasis> numbers are
|
| 5863 | allocated to students so that their answer sheets, with the same
|
| 5864 | subject number, can be differentiated.</para>
|
| 5865 | </listitem>
|
| 5866 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5867 |
|
| 5868 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5869 | <term><option>--pre-allocate
|
| 5870 | <replaceable>copy_id</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5871 |
|
| 5872 | <listitem>
|
| 5873 | <para>This option can be used in conjunction with
|
| 5874 | <option>--multiple</option>. The copy numbers used for the scans
|
| 5875 | will start from <replaceable>copy_id</replaceable>, in the same
|
| 5876 | order than the scans given as arguments.</para>
|
| 5877 | </listitem>
|
| 5878 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5879 |
|
| 5880 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5881 | <term>--try-three | --no-try-three</term>
|
| 5882 |
|
| 5883 | <listitem>
|
| 5884 | <para>Use one of these options to tell if you allow processing
|
| 5885 | of scans where only three corner marks are present.</para>
|
| 5886 | </listitem>
|
| 5887 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5888 |
|
| 5889 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5890 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 5891 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5892 |
|
| 5893 | <listitem>
|
| 5894 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 5895 | </listitem>
|
| 5896 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5897 | </variablelist>
|
| 5898 | </refsect1>
|
| 5899 | </refentry>
|
| 5900 |
|
| 5901 | <refentry id="AMC-note">
|
| 5902 | <refmeta>
|
| 5903 | <refentrytitle>AMC-note</refentrytitle>
|
| 5904 |
|
| 5905 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5906 |
|
| 5907 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5908 |
|
| 5909 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 5910 | </refmeta>
|
| 5911 |
|
| 5912 | <refnamediv>
|
| 5913 | <refname>AMC-note</refname>
|
| 5914 |
|
| 5915 | <refpurpose>computes marks after scans data capture for AMC multiple
|
| 5916 | choice exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 5917 | </refnamediv>
|
| 5918 |
|
| 5919 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5920 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5921 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 5922 |
|
| 5923 | <arg choice="plain">note</arg>
|
| 5924 |
|
| 5925 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 5926 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5927 |
|
| 5928 | <arg>--seuil <replaceable>threshold</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5929 |
|
| 5930 | <arg>--grain <replaceable>granularity</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5931 |
|
| 5932 | <arg>--arrondi <replaceable>rounding</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5933 |
|
| 5934 | <arg>--notemin <replaceable>min</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5935 |
|
| 5936 | <arg>--notemax <replaceable>max</replaceable></arg>
|
| 5937 |
|
| 5938 | <group>
|
| 5939 | <arg choice="plain">--no-plafond</arg>
|
| 5940 |
|
| 5941 | <arg choice="plain">--plafond</arg>
|
| 5942 | </group>
|
| 5943 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 5944 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 5945 |
|
| 5946 | <refsect1>
|
| 5947 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 5948 |
|
| 5949 | <para>The <command>AMC-note.pl</command> command computes marks for
|
| 5950 | all students from the scoring strategy extracted from the LaTeX source
|
| 5951 | file by <citerefentry>
|
| 5952 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 5953 |
|
| 5954 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5955 | </citerefentry> and from the data capture reports made by
|
| 5956 | <citerefentry>
|
| 5957 | <refentrytitle>AMC-analyse</refentrytitle>
|
| 5958 |
|
| 5959 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5960 | </citerefentry>.</para>
|
| 5961 |
|
| 5962 | <variablelist>
|
| 5963 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5964 | <term><option>--data
|
| 5965 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5966 |
|
| 5967 | <listitem>
|
| 5968 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for example
|
| 5969 | <citerefentry>
|
| 5970 | <refentrytitle>AMC-meptex</refentrytitle>
|
| 5971 |
|
| 5972 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 5973 | </citerefentry>).</para>
|
| 5974 | </listitem>
|
| 5975 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5976 |
|
| 5977 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5978 | <term><option>--seuil
|
| 5979 | <replaceable>threshold</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5980 |
|
| 5981 | <listitem>
|
| 5982 | <para>gives the black ratio threshold for deciding whether a box
|
| 5983 | is ticked or not. When deciding whether a box is checked or not,
|
| 5984 | <command>AMC-note.pl</command> compares the black ratio (number
|
| 5985 | of black pixels over total number of pixels) to
|
| 5986 | <replaceable>threshold</replaceable>. If the black ratio is
|
| 5987 | greater then <replaceable>threshold</replaceable>, the box is
|
| 5988 | declared to be checked. Standard values can be 0.15 in the
|
| 5989 | standard layout, or 0.5 for separate answer sheet layout (in
|
| 5990 | this last case, letters are drawn in the boxes, and the students
|
| 5991 | are told to fill the boxes entirely).</para>
|
| 5992 | </listitem>
|
| 5993 | </varlistentry>
|
| 5994 |
|
| 5995 | <varlistentry>
|
| 5996 | <term><option>--grain <replaceable>granularity</replaceable>
|
| 5997 | --arrondi <replaceable>rounding</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 5998 |
|
| 5999 | <listitem>
|
| 6000 | <para>ask marks to be rounded to a multiple of
|
| 6001 | <replaceable>granularity</replaceable>. If
|
| 6002 | <replaceable>rounding</replaceable> is '<literal>i</literal>',
|
| 6003 | rounding is done from below (as with <citerefentry>
|
| 6004 | <refentrytitle>floor</refentrytitle>
|
| 6005 |
|
| 6006 | <manvolnum>3</manvolnum>
|
| 6007 | </citerefentry>). If <replaceable>rounding</replaceable> is
|
| 6008 | '<literal>n</literal>', rounding is done to the nearest multiple
|
| 6009 | of <replaceable>granularity</replaceable>. If
|
| 6010 | <replaceable>rounding</replaceable> is '<literal>s</literal>',
|
| 6011 | rounding is done from above (as with <citerefentry>
|
| 6012 | <refentrytitle>ceil</refentrytitle>
|
| 6013 |
|
| 6014 | <manvolnum>3</manvolnum>
|
| 6015 | </citerefentry>). For example, with options "<option>--grain
|
| 6016 | 0.25 --arrondi s</option>", mark 6.285 is rounded to 6.5.</para>
|
| 6017 | </listitem>
|
| 6018 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6019 |
|
| 6020 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6021 | <term><option>--notemin
|
| 6022 | <replaceable>min</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6023 |
|
| 6024 | <listitem>
|
| 6025 | <para>with this option, all marks below
|
| 6026 | <replaceable>min</replaceable> will be replaced by
|
| 6027 | <replaceable>min</replaceable>.</para>
|
| 6028 | </listitem>
|
| 6029 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6030 |
|
| 6031 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6032 | <term><option>--notemax
|
| 6033 | <replaceable>max</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6034 |
|
| 6035 | <listitem>
|
| 6036 | <para>gives the mark to associate to a sheet where all answers
|
| 6037 | are correct. If not used, marks are not scaled.</para>
|
| 6038 | </listitem>
|
| 6039 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6040 |
|
| 6041 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6042 | <term><option>--plafond</option></term>
|
| 6043 |
|
| 6044 | <listitem>
|
| 6045 | <para>with this option, all marks above
|
| 6046 | <replaceable>max</replaceable> will be replaced by
|
| 6047 | <replaceable>max</replaceable>.</para>
|
| 6048 | </listitem>
|
| 6049 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6050 |
|
| 6051 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6052 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 6053 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6054 |
|
| 6055 | <listitem>
|
| 6056 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 6057 | </listitem>
|
| 6058 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6059 |
|
| 6060 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6061 | <term><option>--postcorrect-student <replaceable>s</replaceable>
|
| 6062 | --postcorrect-copy <replaceable>c</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6063 |
|
| 6064 | <listitem>
|
| 6065 | <para>requests port-correction from the completed answer sheet
|
| 6066 | identified by student and copy numbers. In post-correction mode,
|
| 6067 | correct answers are not extracted from the LaTeX source file,
|
| 6068 | but taken from the answers given on this sheet.</para>
|
| 6069 | </listitem>
|
| 6070 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6071 | </variablelist>
|
| 6072 | </refsect1>
|
| 6073 | </refentry>
|
| 6074 |
|
| 6075 | <refentry id="AMC-association-auto">
|
| 6076 | <refmeta>
|
| 6077 | <refentrytitle>AMC-association-auto</refentrytitle>
|
| 6078 |
|
| 6079 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6080 |
|
| 6081 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6082 |
|
| 6083 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6084 | </refmeta>
|
| 6085 |
|
| 6086 | <refnamediv>
|
| 6087 | <refname>AMC-association-auto</refname>
|
| 6088 |
|
| 6089 | <refpurpose>automatic association between students and answer sheets
|
| 6090 | for AMC multiple choice exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 6091 | </refnamediv>
|
| 6092 |
|
| 6093 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6094 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6095 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 6096 |
|
| 6097 | <arg choice="plain">association-auto</arg>
|
| 6098 |
|
| 6099 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 6100 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6101 |
|
| 6102 | <arg choice="plain">--notes-id <replaceable>id</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6103 |
|
| 6104 | <arg choice="plain">--liste
|
| 6105 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6106 |
|
| 6107 | <arg>--encodage-liste <replaceable>list-encoding</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6108 |
|
| 6109 | <arg choice="plain">--liste-key <replaceable>key</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6110 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6111 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6112 |
|
| 6113 | <refsect1>
|
| 6114 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 6115 |
|
| 6116 | <para>The <command>AMC-association-auto.pl</command> command
|
| 6117 | associates students with their answer sheet (when there are no errors
|
| 6118 | from students when coding their student number and no error during
|
| 6119 | data capture). See <xref linkend="sec.students.id"/> from English user
|
| 6120 | documentation for details.</para>
|
| 6121 |
|
| 6122 | <variablelist>
|
| 6123 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6124 | <term><option>--data
|
| 6125 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6126 |
|
| 6127 | <listitem>
|
| 6128 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for example
|
| 6129 | <citerefentry>
|
| 6130 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 6131 |
|
| 6132 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6133 | </citerefentry>).</para>
|
| 6134 | </listitem>
|
| 6135 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6136 |
|
| 6137 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6138 | <term><option>--notes-id
|
| 6139 | <replaceable>id</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6140 |
|
| 6141 | <listitem>
|
| 6142 | <para>gives the identification string of the code provided for
|
| 6143 | student numbers (command <command>\AMCcode</command> in the
|
| 6144 | LaTeX source file).</para>
|
| 6145 | </listitem>
|
| 6146 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6147 |
|
| 6148 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6149 | <term><option>--pre-association</option></term>
|
| 6150 |
|
| 6151 | <listitem>
|
| 6152 | <para>if used, the <option>--notes-id</option> option is ignored
|
| 6153 | and the automatic association is made from the pre-association
|
| 6154 | data (command <command>\AMCassociation</command> in the LaTeX
|
| 6155 | source file).</para>
|
| 6156 | </listitem>
|
| 6157 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6158 |
|
| 6159 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6160 | <term><option>--liste
|
| 6161 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6162 |
|
| 6163 | <listitem>
|
| 6164 | <para>gives the students list.</para>
|
| 6165 | </listitem>
|
| 6166 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6167 |
|
| 6168 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6169 | <term><option>--encodage-liste
|
| 6170 | <replaceable>list-encoding</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6171 |
|
| 6172 | <listitem>
|
| 6173 | <para>gives the students list file encoding (default is
|
| 6174 | utf-8).</para>
|
| 6175 | </listitem>
|
| 6176 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6177 |
|
| 6178 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6179 | <term><option>--liste-key
|
| 6180 | <replaceable>key</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6181 |
|
| 6182 | <listitem>
|
| 6183 | <para>gives the column name where to find the student number in
|
| 6184 | the students list.</para>
|
| 6185 | </listitem>
|
| 6186 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6187 |
|
| 6188 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6189 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 6190 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6191 |
|
| 6192 | <listitem>
|
| 6193 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 6194 | </listitem>
|
| 6195 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6196 | </variablelist>
|
| 6197 | </refsect1>
|
| 6198 | </refentry>
|
| 6199 |
|
| 6200 | <refentry id="AMC-association">
|
| 6201 | <refmeta>
|
| 6202 | <refentrytitle>AMC-association</refentrytitle>
|
| 6203 |
|
| 6204 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6205 |
|
| 6206 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6207 |
|
| 6208 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6209 | </refmeta>
|
| 6210 |
|
| 6211 | <refnamediv>
|
| 6212 | <refname>AMC-association</refname>
|
| 6213 |
|
| 6214 | <refpurpose>manual association between students and answer sheets for
|
| 6215 | AMC multiple choice exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 6216 | </refnamediv>
|
| 6217 |
|
| 6218 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6219 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6220 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 6221 |
|
| 6222 | <arg choice="plain">association</arg>
|
| 6223 |
|
| 6224 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 6225 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6226 |
|
| 6227 | <arg choice="plain">--list</arg>
|
| 6228 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6229 |
|
| 6230 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6231 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 6232 |
|
| 6233 | <arg choice="plain">association</arg>
|
| 6234 |
|
| 6235 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 6236 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6237 |
|
| 6238 | <arg choice="plain">--set</arg>
|
| 6239 |
|
| 6240 | <arg choice="plain">--student
|
| 6241 | <replaceable>student-sheet-number</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6242 |
|
| 6243 | <arg>--copy <replaceable>copy-number</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6244 |
|
| 6245 | <arg choice="plain">--id <replaceable>student-id</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6246 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6247 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6248 |
|
| 6249 | <refsect1>
|
| 6250 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 6251 |
|
| 6252 | <para>The <command>AMC-association.pl</command> command handles
|
| 6253 | association data between students and their answer sheet.</para>
|
| 6254 |
|
| 6255 | <variablelist>
|
| 6256 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6257 | <term><option>--data
|
| 6258 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6259 |
|
| 6260 | <listitem>
|
| 6261 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for example
|
| 6262 | <citerefentry>
|
| 6263 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 6264 |
|
| 6265 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6266 | </citerefentry>).</para>
|
| 6267 | </listitem>
|
| 6268 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6269 | </variablelist>
|
| 6270 |
|
| 6271 | <para>With option <option>--list</option>, all association data is
|
| 6272 | output.</para>
|
| 6273 |
|
| 6274 | <para>With option <option>--set</option>, a manual association is
|
| 6275 | updated.</para>
|
| 6276 | </refsect1>
|
| 6277 | </refentry>
|
| 6278 |
|
| 6279 | <refentry id="AMC-export">
|
| 6280 | <refmeta>
|
| 6281 | <refentrytitle>AMC-export</refentrytitle>
|
| 6282 |
|
| 6283 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6284 |
|
| 6285 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6286 |
|
| 6287 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6288 | </refmeta>
|
| 6289 |
|
| 6290 | <refnamediv>
|
| 6291 | <refname>AMC-export</refname>
|
| 6292 |
|
| 6293 | <refpurpose>exports marks for AMC multiple choice exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 6294 | </refnamediv>
|
| 6295 |
|
| 6296 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6297 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6298 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 6299 |
|
| 6300 | <arg choice="plain">export</arg>
|
| 6301 |
|
| 6302 | <arg choice="plain">--data
|
| 6303 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6304 |
|
| 6305 | <arg choice="plain">--module <replaceable>module</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6306 |
|
| 6307 | <arg choice="plain">--fich-noms
|
| 6308 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6309 |
|
| 6310 | <arg>--noms-encodage <replaceable>list-encoding</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6311 |
|
| 6312 | <arg choice="plain">--o <replaceable>output-file</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6313 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6314 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6315 |
|
| 6316 | <refsect1>
|
| 6317 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 6318 |
|
| 6319 | <para>The <command>AMC-export.pl</command> command exports marks from
|
| 6320 | an Auto Multiple Choice exam.</para>
|
| 6321 |
|
| 6322 | <variablelist>
|
| 6323 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6324 | <term><option>--data
|
| 6325 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6326 |
|
| 6327 | <listitem>
|
| 6328 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (see for example
|
| 6329 | <citerefentry>
|
| 6330 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 6331 |
|
| 6332 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6333 | </citerefentry>).</para>
|
| 6334 | </listitem>
|
| 6335 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6336 |
|
| 6337 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6338 | <term><option>--module
|
| 6339 | <replaceable>module</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6340 |
|
| 6341 | <listitem>
|
| 6342 | <para>selects a module for export. See below for the modules
|
| 6343 | included in the AMC standard distribution.</para>
|
| 6344 | </listitem>
|
| 6345 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6346 |
|
| 6347 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6348 | <term><option>--fich-noms
|
| 6349 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6350 |
|
| 6351 | <listitem>
|
| 6352 | <para>sets the students list file.</para>
|
| 6353 | </listitem>
|
| 6354 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6355 |
|
| 6356 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6357 | <term><option>--noms-encodage
|
| 6358 | <replaceable>list-encoding</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6359 |
|
| 6360 | <listitem>
|
| 6361 | <para>selects an encoding for file
|
| 6362 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable> (default is
|
| 6363 | utf-8).</para>
|
| 6364 | </listitem>
|
| 6365 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6366 |
|
| 6367 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6368 | <term><option>--o
|
| 6369 | <replaceable>output-file</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6370 |
|
| 6371 | <listitem>
|
| 6372 | <para>gives the output file name.</para>
|
| 6373 | </listitem>
|
| 6374 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6375 |
|
| 6376 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6377 | <term><option>--option-out
|
| 6378 | <replaceable>options</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6379 |
|
| 6380 | <listitem>
|
| 6381 | <para>gives an option for selected module, in the form
|
| 6382 | <literal>key=value</literal> (see below for possible options for
|
| 6383 | each module). To specify multiple options, use
|
| 6384 | <option>--option</option> several times.</para>
|
| 6385 | </listitem>
|
| 6386 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6387 |
|
| 6388 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6389 | <term><option>--sort
|
| 6390 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6391 |
|
| 6392 | <listitem>
|
| 6393 | <para>sort the students names, depending on
|
| 6394 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable>. If
|
| 6395 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable> is <literal>l</literal>,
|
| 6396 | use line number from students list file to sort. If
|
| 6397 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable> is <literal>m</literal>,
|
| 6398 | use mark (and name if marks are equal) to sort. If
|
| 6399 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable> is <literal>i</literal>,
|
| 6400 | use student number to sort. If
|
| 6401 | <replaceable>sort-type</replaceable> is <literal>n</literal>,
|
| 6402 | use name to sort (or line from students list if equal).</para>
|
| 6403 | </listitem>
|
| 6404 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6405 |
|
| 6406 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6407 | <term><option>--useall
|
| 6408 | <replaceable>all</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6409 |
|
| 6410 | <listitem>
|
| 6411 | <para>if <replaceable>all</replaceable> is <literal>0</literal>
|
| 6412 | or empty, only students with a scanned answer sheet appears in
|
| 6413 | the output. If <replaceable>all</replaceable> is
|
| 6414 | <literal>1</literal>, all students in the students list appears
|
| 6415 | in the output.</para>
|
| 6416 | </listitem>
|
| 6417 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6418 | </variablelist>
|
| 6419 | </refsect1>
|
| 6420 |
|
| 6421 | <refsect1>
|
| 6422 | <title>Modules</title>
|
| 6423 |
|
| 6424 | <refsect2>
|
| 6425 | <title>OpenDocument</title>
|
| 6426 |
|
| 6427 | <para>With "<option>--module ods</option>", an OpenDocument (for use
|
| 6428 | by OpenOffice or LibreOffice for example) is produced. The following
|
| 6429 | options are recognized:</para>
|
| 6430 |
|
| 6431 | <variablelist>
|
| 6432 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6433 | <term>nom</term>
|
| 6434 |
|
| 6435 | <listitem>
|
| 6436 | <para>gives a name for the exam, to be written on the
|
| 6437 | beginning of the sheet.</para>
|
| 6438 | </listitem>
|
| 6439 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6440 |
|
| 6441 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6442 | <term>code</term>
|
| 6443 |
|
| 6444 | <listitem>
|
| 6445 | <para>gives an short name for the exam, to be used as a tab
|
| 6446 | name.</para>
|
| 6447 | </listitem>
|
| 6448 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6449 |
|
| 6450 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6451 | <term>columns</term>
|
| 6452 |
|
| 6453 | <listitem>
|
| 6454 | <para>sets the list of columns that are to be added to each
|
| 6455 | student. Default value is
|
| 6456 | <code>student.key,student.name</code>.</para>
|
| 6457 | </listitem>
|
| 6458 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6459 |
|
| 6460 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6461 | <term>stats</term>
|
| 6462 |
|
| 6463 | <listitem>
|
| 6464 | <para>with a true value, a table will be added with statistics
|
| 6465 | for all questions.</para>
|
| 6466 | </listitem>
|
| 6467 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6468 |
|
| 6469 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6470 | <term>statsindic</term>
|
| 6471 |
|
| 6472 | <listitem>
|
| 6473 | <para>with a true value, a table will be added with statistics
|
| 6474 | for all indicative questions.</para>
|
| 6475 | </listitem>
|
| 6476 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6477 | </variablelist>
|
| 6478 | </refsect2>
|
| 6479 |
|
| 6480 | <refsect2>
|
| 6481 | <title>CSV</title>
|
| 6482 |
|
| 6483 | <para>With "<option>--module CSV</option>", a CSV file is produced.
|
| 6484 | The following options are recognized:</para>
|
| 6485 |
|
| 6486 | <variablelist>
|
| 6487 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6488 | <term>columns</term>
|
| 6489 |
|
| 6490 | <listitem>
|
| 6491 | <para>sets the list of columns that are to be added to each
|
| 6492 | student. Default value is
|
| 6493 | <code>student.copy,student.key,student.name</code>.</para>
|
| 6494 | </listitem>
|
| 6495 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6496 |
|
| 6497 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6498 | <term>decimal</term>
|
| 6499 |
|
| 6500 | <listitem>
|
| 6501 | <para>sets the decimal point (default is a dot).</para>
|
| 6502 | </listitem>
|
| 6503 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6504 |
|
| 6505 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6506 | <term>encodage</term>
|
| 6507 |
|
| 6508 | <listitem>
|
| 6509 | <para>sets the encoding to use for output (default is
|
| 6510 | utf-8).</para>
|
| 6511 | </listitem>
|
| 6512 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6513 |
|
| 6514 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6515 | <term>separateur</term>
|
| 6516 |
|
| 6517 | <listitem>
|
| 6518 | <para>sets the character used between colums (default is a
|
| 6519 | comma).</para>
|
| 6520 | </listitem>
|
| 6521 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6522 |
|
| 6523 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6524 | <term>entoure</term>
|
| 6525 |
|
| 6526 | <listitem>
|
| 6527 | <para>sets the character used to enclose strings (default is a
|
| 6528 | double quote).</para>
|
| 6529 | </listitem>
|
| 6530 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6531 |
|
| 6532 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6533 | <term>ticked</term>
|
| 6534 |
|
| 6535 | <listitem>
|
| 6536 | <para>if not empty, additional columns (with
|
| 6537 | "<literal>CHECKED:</literal>" prefix) are included to give all
|
| 6538 | the checked boxes on all the sheets. This can be used by an
|
| 6539 | external program to retrieve all the checked boxes when marks
|
| 6540 | are not sufficient. Use value <literal>01</literal> to get
|
| 6541 | 0;0;1;1;0 if boxes 3 and 4 are checked, and value
|
| 6542 | <literal>AB</literal> to get CD if boxes 3 and 4 are
|
| 6543 | checked.</para>
|
| 6544 | </listitem>
|
| 6545 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6546 | </variablelist>
|
| 6547 | </refsect2>
|
| 6548 |
|
| 6549 | <refsect2>
|
| 6550 | <title>List</title>
|
| 6551 |
|
| 6552 | <para>With "<option>--module List</option>", a PDF file is produced
|
| 6553 | with a list of marks for all students. The following options are
|
| 6554 | recognized:</para>
|
| 6555 |
|
| 6556 | <variablelist>
|
| 6557 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6558 | <term>pagesize</term>
|
| 6559 |
|
| 6560 | <listitem>
|
| 6561 | <para>The page size. Default value is <code>a4</code>.</para>
|
| 6562 | </listitem>
|
| 6563 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6564 |
|
| 6565 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6566 | <term>nom</term>
|
| 6567 |
|
| 6568 | <listitem>
|
| 6569 | <para>gives the name of the exam, to be printed at the top of
|
| 6570 | the page.</para>
|
| 6571 | </listitem>
|
| 6572 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6573 |
|
| 6574 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6575 | <term>ncols</term>
|
| 6576 |
|
| 6577 | <listitem>
|
| 6578 | <para>The number of columns. Default value is 2.</para>
|
| 6579 | </listitem>
|
| 6580 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6581 |
|
| 6582 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6583 | <term>decimal</term>
|
| 6584 |
|
| 6585 | <listitem>
|
| 6586 | <para>sets the decimal point (default is a dot).</para>
|
| 6587 | </listitem>
|
| 6588 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6589 | </variablelist>
|
| 6590 | </refsect2>
|
| 6591 | </refsect1>
|
| 6592 | </refentry>
|
| 6593 |
|
| 6594 | <refentry id="AMC-annote">
|
| 6595 | <refmeta>
|
| 6596 | <refentrytitle>AMC-annotate</refentrytitle>
|
| 6597 |
|
| 6598 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6599 |
|
| 6600 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6601 |
|
| 6602 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 6603 | </refmeta>
|
| 6604 |
|
| 6605 | <refnamediv>
|
| 6606 | <refname>AMC-annotate</refname>
|
| 6607 |
|
| 6608 | <refpurpose>completed answer sheets annotation after marking for AMC
|
| 6609 | multiple choice exams.</refpurpose>
|
| 6610 | </refnamediv>
|
| 6611 |
|
| 6612 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6613 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6614 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 6615 |
|
| 6616 | <arg choice="plain">annotate</arg>
|
| 6617 |
|
| 6618 | <arg choice="plain">--projet
|
| 6619 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6620 |
|
| 6621 | <arg choice="plain">--names-file
|
| 6622 | <replaceable>students.csv</replaceable></arg>
|
| 6623 |
|
| 6624 | <arg rep="repeat">annotation options</arg>
|
| 6625 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 6626 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 6627 |
|
| 6628 | <refsect1>
|
| 6629 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 6630 |
|
| 6631 | <para>The <command>AMC-annotate.pl</command> command annotates papers
|
| 6632 | scans with scores for all questions, global score and mark, resulting
|
| 6633 | in PDF files (one for each student, or one single file).</para>
|
| 6634 |
|
| 6635 | <refsect2>
|
| 6636 | <title>General options</title>
|
| 6637 |
|
| 6638 | <variablelist>
|
| 6639 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6640 | <term><option>--projet
|
| 6641 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6642 |
|
| 6643 | <listitem>
|
| 6644 | <para>sets the project name or directory.</para>
|
| 6645 | </listitem>
|
| 6646 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6647 |
|
| 6648 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6649 | <term><option>--data
|
| 6650 | <replaceable>project-data-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6651 |
|
| 6652 | <listitem>
|
| 6653 | <para>gives the directory where data files are (default value
|
| 6654 | is
|
| 6655 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/data</filename>).</para>
|
| 6656 | </listitem>
|
| 6657 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6658 |
|
| 6659 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6660 | <term><option>--pdf-dir
|
| 6661 | <replaceable>pdf-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6662 |
|
| 6663 | <listitem>
|
| 6664 | <para>sets the project pdf directory, where to output
|
| 6665 | annotated scans (default value is
|
| 6666 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/cr/corrections/pdf</filename>).</para>
|
| 6667 | </listitem>
|
| 6668 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6669 |
|
| 6670 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6671 | <term><option>--names-file
|
| 6672 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6673 |
|
| 6674 | <listitem>
|
| 6675 | <para>sets the students list file name.</para>
|
| 6676 | </listitem>
|
| 6677 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6678 |
|
| 6679 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6680 | <term><option>--names-encoding
|
| 6681 | <replaceable>encoding</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6682 |
|
| 6683 | <listitem>
|
| 6684 | <para>selects an encoding for file
|
| 6685 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable> (default is
|
| 6686 | utf-8).</para>
|
| 6687 | </listitem>
|
| 6688 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6689 |
|
| 6690 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6691 | <term><option>--association-key
|
| 6692 | <replaceable>key</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6693 |
|
| 6694 | <listitem>
|
| 6695 | <para>sets the key (column name in the students list file)
|
| 6696 | that is used for association. Default value is stored in the
|
| 6697 | database from value actually used for association, so this
|
| 6698 | option should not be used.</para>
|
| 6699 | </listitem>
|
| 6700 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6701 |
|
| 6702 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6703 | <term><option>--subject
|
| 6704 | <replaceable>subject.pdf</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6705 |
|
| 6706 | <listitem>
|
| 6707 | <para>sets the path to the PDF question file (default is
|
| 6708 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/DOC-sujet.pdf</filename>).</para>
|
| 6709 | </listitem>
|
| 6710 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6711 |
|
| 6712 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6713 | <term><option>--compose
|
| 6714 | <replaceable>mode</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6715 |
|
| 6716 | <listitem>
|
| 6717 | <para>use this option if you want to take pages from the
|
| 6718 | subject when there is no boxes to be filled on them (for
|
| 6719 | example, question pages before the annotated answer sheet).
|
| 6720 | When <replaceable>mode</replaceable> equals 1, the pages are
|
| 6721 | taken from the subject, are filled or not according to the
|
| 6722 | student's answers (the same as on the answer sheet), and the
|
| 6723 | same correction marks are drawn as on the answer sheet. When
|
| 6724 | mode equals 2, the pages are taken from the corrected answer
|
| 6725 | sheet (so the ticked answers are the correct ones), and no
|
| 6726 | correction marks are drawn.</para>
|
| 6727 | </listitem>
|
| 6728 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6729 |
|
| 6730 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6731 | <term><option>--corrected
|
| 6732 | <replaceable>corrected.pdf</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6733 |
|
| 6734 | <listitem>
|
| 6735 | <para>sets the path to the PDF corrected subject (default is
|
| 6736 | <filename><replaceable>project-dir</replaceable>/DOC-corrected.pdf</filename>).
|
| 6737 | If not present, this file will be built using values from
|
| 6738 | options <option>--n-copies</option>, <option>--with</option>,
|
| 6739 | <option>--filter</option> and
|
| 6740 | <option>--filtered-source</option>).</para>
|
| 6741 | </listitem>
|
| 6742 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6743 |
|
| 6744 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6745 | <term><option>--darkness-threshold
|
| 6746 | <replaceable>t</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6747 |
|
| 6748 | <listitem>
|
| 6749 | <para>sets the darkness threshold. Default value is stored in
|
| 6750 | the database from value actually used for scoring, so this
|
| 6751 | option should not be used.</para>
|
| 6752 | </listitem>
|
| 6753 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6754 |
|
| 6755 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6756 | <term><option>--csv-build-name
|
| 6757 | <replaceable>name-model</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6758 |
|
| 6759 | <listitem>
|
| 6760 | <para>sets the model for building students names from the
|
| 6761 | students list file. Default value is '<code>(nom|surname)
|
| 6762 | (prenom|name)</code>', so that the name is built using the
|
| 6763 | <code>nom</code> column content (or the <code>surname</code>
|
| 6764 | column if the <code>nom</code> column does not exist),
|
| 6765 | followed by the content of the <code>prenom</code> column (or
|
| 6766 | the <code>name</code> column), so that the result should be OK
|
| 6767 | for French or English simple CSV files.</para>
|
| 6768 | </listitem>
|
| 6769 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6770 |
|
| 6771 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6772 | <term><option>--id-file
|
| 6773 | <replaceable>ids.txt</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6774 |
|
| 6775 | <listitem>
|
| 6776 | <para>gives a filename where to find the ids of copies to
|
| 6777 | annotate (one per line, either the student number if photocopy
|
| 6778 | mode is off, or
|
| 6779 | <code><replaceable>student</replaceable>:<replaceable>copy</replaceable></code>
|
| 6780 | if the photocopy mode is on). If no file is given, then all
|
| 6781 | copies will be annotated.</para>
|
| 6782 | </listitem>
|
| 6783 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6784 |
|
| 6785 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6786 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 6787 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6788 |
|
| 6789 | <listitem>
|
| 6790 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 6791 | </listitem>
|
| 6792 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6793 | </variablelist>
|
| 6794 | </refsect2>
|
| 6795 |
|
| 6796 | <refsect2>
|
| 6797 | <title>PDF output options</title>
|
| 6798 |
|
| 6799 | <variablelist>
|
| 6800 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6801 | <term><option>--single-output</option></term>
|
| 6802 |
|
| 6803 | <listitem>
|
| 6804 | <para>use this option if you need all annotated copies in a
|
| 6805 | single PDF file. Default behavior is to build one PDF file per
|
| 6806 | student.</para>
|
| 6807 | </listitem>
|
| 6808 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6809 |
|
| 6810 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6811 | <term><option>--sort
|
| 6812 | <replaceable>s</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6813 |
|
| 6814 | <listitem>
|
| 6815 | <para>sets the sort key (only useful when using
|
| 6816 | <option>--single-output</option>): use</para>
|
| 6817 |
|
| 6818 | <variablelist>
|
| 6819 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6820 | <term>l</term>
|
| 6821 |
|
| 6822 | <listitem>
|
| 6823 | <para>to keep students in the same order as in the
|
| 6824 | students list file.</para>
|
| 6825 | </listitem>
|
| 6826 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6827 |
|
| 6828 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6829 | <term>m</term>
|
| 6830 |
|
| 6831 | <listitem>
|
| 6832 | <para>to sort students according to their marks.</para>
|
| 6833 | </listitem>
|
| 6834 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6835 |
|
| 6836 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6837 | <term>i</term>
|
| 6838 |
|
| 6839 | <listitem>
|
| 6840 | <para>to sort students according to the copy id.</para>
|
| 6841 | </listitem>
|
| 6842 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6843 |
|
| 6844 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6845 | <term>n</term>
|
| 6846 |
|
| 6847 | <listitem>
|
| 6848 | <para>to sort students according to their names.</para>
|
| 6849 | </listitem>
|
| 6850 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6851 | </variablelist>
|
| 6852 | </listitem>
|
| 6853 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6854 |
|
| 6855 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6856 | <term><option>--filename-model
|
| 6857 | <replaceable>model</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6858 |
|
| 6859 | <listitem>
|
| 6860 | <para>sets a file name model for annotated PDFs. In this
|
| 6861 | model, some sequences will be substituted:</para>
|
| 6862 |
|
| 6863 | <variablelist>
|
| 6864 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6865 | <term><literal>(N)</literal></term>
|
| 6866 |
|
| 6867 | <listitem>
|
| 6868 | <para>is replaced by the student's name (see
|
| 6869 | <option>--csv-build-name</option>).</para>
|
| 6870 | </listitem>
|
| 6871 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6872 |
|
| 6873 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6874 | <term><literal>(ID)</literal></term>
|
| 6875 |
|
| 6876 | <listitem>
|
| 6877 | <para>is replaced by the student number.</para>
|
| 6878 | </listitem>
|
| 6879 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6880 |
|
| 6881 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6882 | <term><literal>(<replaceable>COL</replaceable>)</literal></term>
|
| 6883 |
|
| 6884 | <listitem>
|
| 6885 | <para>is replaced by the value of column
|
| 6886 | <replaceable>COL</replaceable> in the students list for
|
| 6887 | the current student.</para>
|
| 6888 | </listitem>
|
| 6889 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6890 | </variablelist>
|
| 6891 |
|
| 6892 | <para>The default value is
|
| 6893 | '<literal>(N)-(ID).pdf</literal>'.</para>
|
| 6894 | </listitem>
|
| 6895 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6896 | </variablelist>
|
| 6897 | </refsect2>
|
| 6898 |
|
| 6899 | <refsect2>
|
| 6900 | <title>Source file options</title>
|
| 6901 |
|
| 6902 | <para>These options are used when the <option>--corrected</option>
|
| 6903 | path points to a non-existing file, so that this file can be
|
| 6904 | rebuilt.</para>
|
| 6905 |
|
| 6906 | <variablelist>
|
| 6907 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6908 | <term><option>--src <replaceable>mcq-source-file</replaceable>
|
| 6909 | --n-copies <replaceable>n</replaceable> --with
|
| 6910 | <replaceable>latex-engine</replaceable> --filter
|
| 6911 | <replaceable>filter-name</replaceable> --filtered-source
|
| 6912 | <replaceable>fs.tex</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6913 |
|
| 6914 | <listitem>
|
| 6915 | <para>see <citerefentry>
|
| 6916 | <refentrytitle>AMC-prepare</refentrytitle>
|
| 6917 |
|
| 6918 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 6919 | </citerefentry>.</para>
|
| 6920 | </listitem>
|
| 6921 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6922 | </variablelist>
|
| 6923 | </refsect2>
|
| 6924 |
|
| 6925 | <refsect2>
|
| 6926 | <title>Options for embedded scans</title>
|
| 6927 |
|
| 6928 | <para>When present, scans are embedded in the annotated PDF file.
|
| 6929 | The following options control the quality of the embedded scans, to
|
| 6930 | reduce the annotated file size.</para>
|
| 6931 |
|
| 6932 | <variablelist>
|
| 6933 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6934 | <term><option>--embedded-max-size
|
| 6935 | <replaceable>maxsize</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6936 |
|
| 6937 | <listitem>
|
| 6938 | <para>sets the maximal size for scans (in the format
|
| 6939 | <literal><replaceable>width</replaceable>x<replaceable>height</replaceable></literal>,
|
| 6940 | in pixels). Default value is the empty string, which means
|
| 6941 | there is no maximum size. Scans that are larger will be
|
| 6942 | reduced before being included in the annotated file.</para>
|
| 6943 | </listitem>
|
| 6944 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6945 |
|
| 6946 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6947 | <term><option>--embedded-format
|
| 6948 | <replaceable>format</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6949 |
|
| 6950 | <listitem>
|
| 6951 | <para>sets the format for scans inclusion:
|
| 6952 | <replaceable>jpeg</replaceable> or
|
| 6953 | <replaceable>png</replaceable>.</para>
|
| 6954 | </listitem>
|
| 6955 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6956 |
|
| 6957 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6958 | <term><option>--embedded-jpeg-quality
|
| 6959 | <replaceable>quality</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6960 |
|
| 6961 | <listitem>
|
| 6962 | <para>sets the JPEG quality (from 1 to 100) for jpeg embedded
|
| 6963 | scans.</para>
|
| 6964 | </listitem>
|
| 6965 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6966 | </variablelist>
|
| 6967 | </refsect2>
|
| 6968 |
|
| 6969 | <refsect2>
|
| 6970 | <title>Annotation options</title>
|
| 6971 |
|
| 6972 | <para>These options controls what kind of annotations are being to
|
| 6973 | be drawn.</para>
|
| 6974 |
|
| 6975 | <variablelist>
|
| 6976 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6977 | <term><option>--font-size
|
| 6978 | <replaceable>fs</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6979 |
|
| 6980 | <listitem>
|
| 6981 | <para>sets the font size, in points, for annotations.</para>
|
| 6982 | </listitem>
|
| 6983 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6984 |
|
| 6985 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6986 | <term><option>--text-color
|
| 6987 | <replaceable>color</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6988 |
|
| 6989 | <listitem>
|
| 6990 | <para>text color for annotations. Default value is
|
| 6991 | <replaceable>red</replaceable>.</para>
|
| 6992 | </listitem>
|
| 6993 | </varlistentry>
|
| 6994 |
|
| 6995 | <varlistentry>
|
| 6996 | <term><option>--verdict
|
| 6997 | <replaceable>header</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 6998 |
|
| 6999 | <listitem>
|
| 7000 | <para>sets the text header to be printed on each first page of
|
| 7001 | the students copies. This text may contain CR characters for
|
| 7002 | multi-line headers. Some sequences are substituted in
|
| 7003 | it:</para>
|
| 7004 |
|
| 7005 | <variablelist>
|
| 7006 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7007 | <term><literal>%S</literal></term>
|
| 7008 |
|
| 7009 | <listitem>
|
| 7010 | <para>is replaced by the student total score.</para>
|
| 7011 | </listitem>
|
| 7012 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7013 |
|
| 7014 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7015 | <term><literal>%M</literal></term>
|
| 7016 |
|
| 7017 | <listitem>
|
| 7018 | <para>is replaced by the maximum total score.</para>
|
| 7019 | </listitem>
|
| 7020 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7021 |
|
| 7022 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7023 | <term><literal>%s</literal></term>
|
| 7024 |
|
| 7025 | <listitem>
|
| 7026 | <para>is replaced by the student mark.</para>
|
| 7027 | </listitem>
|
| 7028 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7029 |
|
| 7030 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7031 | <term><literal>%m</literal></term>
|
| 7032 |
|
| 7033 | <listitem>
|
| 7034 | <para>is replaced by the maximum mark.</para>
|
| 7035 | </listitem>
|
| 7036 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7037 |
|
| 7038 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7039 | <term><literal>%(ID)</literal></term>
|
| 7040 |
|
| 7041 | <listitem>
|
| 7042 | <para>is replaced by the student's name.</para>
|
| 7043 | </listitem>
|
| 7044 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7045 |
|
| 7046 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7047 | <term><literal>%(<replaceable>COL</replaceable>)</literal></term>
|
| 7048 |
|
| 7049 | <listitem>
|
| 7050 | <para>is replaced by the value of column
|
| 7051 | <replaceable>COL</replaceable> in the students list for
|
| 7052 | the current student.</para>
|
| 7053 | </listitem>
|
| 7054 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7055 | </variablelist>
|
| 7056 | </listitem>
|
| 7057 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7058 |
|
| 7059 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7060 | <term><option>--position
|
| 7061 | <replaceable>pos</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7062 |
|
| 7063 | <listitem>
|
| 7064 | <para>sets the position where question scores are to be
|
| 7065 | written:</para>
|
| 7066 |
|
| 7067 | <variablelist>
|
| 7068 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7069 | <term>marge</term>
|
| 7070 |
|
| 7071 | <listitem>
|
| 7072 | <para>the scores will be written in the left
|
| 7073 | margin</para>
|
| 7074 | </listitem>
|
| 7075 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7076 |
|
| 7077 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7078 | <term>marges</term>
|
| 7079 |
|
| 7080 | <listitem>
|
| 7081 | <para>the scores will be written in the closest margin
|
| 7082 | (left or right).</para>
|
| 7083 | </listitem>
|
| 7084 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7085 |
|
| 7086 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7087 | <term>case</term>
|
| 7088 |
|
| 7089 | <listitem>
|
| 7090 | <para>the scores will be written near the boxes</para>
|
| 7091 | </listitem>
|
| 7092 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7093 |
|
| 7094 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7095 | <term>none</term>
|
| 7096 |
|
| 7097 | <listitem>
|
| 7098 | <para>the scores won't be written.</para>
|
| 7099 | </listitem>
|
| 7100 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7101 | </variablelist>
|
| 7102 | </listitem>
|
| 7103 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7104 |
|
| 7105 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7106 | <term>--verdict-question
|
| 7107 | <replaceable>perl-expression</replaceable></term>
|
| 7108 |
|
| 7109 | <listitem>
|
| 7110 | <para>sets the text to be printed next to all questions,
|
| 7111 | through a perl expression to be evaluated (if you need a
|
| 7112 | simple text, simply quote it with <code>"</code>). Some
|
| 7113 | sequences are substituted in it before evaluation:</para>
|
| 7114 |
|
| 7115 | <variablelist>
|
| 7116 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7117 | <term><literal>%S</literal></term>
|
| 7118 |
|
| 7119 | <listitem>
|
| 7120 | <para>is replaced by the student score for this
|
| 7121 | question.</para>
|
| 7122 | </listitem>
|
| 7123 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7124 |
|
| 7125 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7126 | <term><literal>%M</literal></term>
|
| 7127 |
|
| 7128 | <listitem>
|
| 7129 | <para>is replaced by the maximum score for this
|
| 7130 | question.</para>
|
| 7131 | </listitem>
|
| 7132 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7133 |
|
| 7134 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7135 | <term><literal>%s</literal></term>
|
| 7136 |
|
| 7137 | <listitem>
|
| 7138 | <para>is the same as <code>%S</code>, but rounded to
|
| 7139 | <replaceable>nc</replaceable> significant digits (see
|
| 7140 | option <option>--ch-sign</option>).</para>
|
| 7141 | </listitem>
|
| 7142 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7143 |
|
| 7144 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7145 | <term><literal>%m</literal></term>
|
| 7146 |
|
| 7147 | <listitem>
|
| 7148 | <para>is the same as <code>%M</code>, but rounded to
|
| 7149 | <replaceable>nc</replaceable> significant digits (see
|
| 7150 | option <option>--ch-sign</option>).</para>
|
| 7151 | </listitem>
|
| 7152 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7153 | </variablelist>
|
| 7154 |
|
| 7155 | <para>A standard value for this option is
|
| 7156 | <code>"\"%s/%m\""</code>. You can also use tests (with the
|
| 7157 | perl syntax <code>( TEST ? IF-YES : IF-NO )</code>) to write
|
| 7158 | <emphasis>Valid</emphasis> if the score is the maximal score,
|
| 7159 | or <emphasis>Failed</emphasis> if not, using</para>
|
| 7160 |
|
| 7161 | <programlisting>--verdict-question "(%S==%M ? \"Valid\" : \"Failed\")"</programlisting>
|
| 7162 | </listitem>
|
| 7163 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7164 |
|
| 7165 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7166 | <term>--verdict-question-cancelled
|
| 7167 | <replaceable>perl-expression</replaceable></term>
|
| 7168 |
|
| 7169 | <listitem>
|
| 7170 | <para>same as <option>--verdict-question</option>, but applies
|
| 7171 | for cancelled questions (see <code>allowempty</code> scoring
|
| 7172 | strategy). The default value is <code>"X"</code>.</para>
|
| 7173 | </listitem>
|
| 7174 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7175 |
|
| 7176 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7177 | <term><option>--indicatives</option></term>
|
| 7178 |
|
| 7179 | <listitem>
|
| 7180 | <para>use this option to request boxes annotation for
|
| 7181 | indicative questions (these questions' scores won't be taken
|
| 7182 | into account while computing the global score. The
|
| 7183 | correct/wrong status is often irrelevant for these questions,
|
| 7184 | so there is no point correcting the corresponding
|
| 7185 | boxes).</para>
|
| 7186 | </listitem>
|
| 7187 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7188 |
|
| 7189 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7190 | <term><option>--line-width
|
| 7191 | <replaceable>width</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7192 |
|
| 7193 | <listitem>
|
| 7194 | <para>sets the line width (in points) when drawing symbols to
|
| 7195 | correct answers.</para>
|
| 7196 | </listitem>
|
| 7197 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7198 |
|
| 7199 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7200 | <term><option>--symbols
|
| 7201 | <replaceable>symbols-definition</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7202 |
|
| 7203 | <listitem>
|
| 7204 | <para>defines how boxes will be annotated. symbols-definition
|
| 7205 | is a comma separated list of
|
| 7206 | <literal><replaceable>H</replaceable>-<replaceable>A</replaceable>:<replaceable>shape</replaceable>:<replaceable>color</replaceable></literal>
|
| 7207 | constructs, where <replaceable>H</replaceable> is
|
| 7208 | <literal>0</literal> or <literal>1</literal> depending on
|
| 7209 | whether the box has to be checked or not,
|
| 7210 | <replaceable>A</replaceable> is <literal>0</literal> or
|
| 7211 | <literal>1</literal> depending on whether the box is actually
|
| 7212 | checked or not, <replaceable>shape</replaceable> is one of
|
| 7213 | <literal>none</literal>, <literal>circle</literal>,
|
| 7214 | <literal>mark</literal>, <literal>box</literal> and
|
| 7215 | <replaceable>color</replaceable> is a color (name or #RGB, see
|
| 7216 | ImageMagick or GraphicsMagick documentation for details).
|
| 7217 | Default value is
|
| 7218 | "<code>0-0:none,0-1:circle:red,1-0:mark:red,1-1:mark:blue</code>".</para>
|
| 7219 | </listitem>
|
| 7220 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7221 | </variablelist>
|
| 7222 | </refsect2>
|
| 7223 |
|
| 7224 | <refsect2>
|
| 7225 | <title>Lengths</title>
|
| 7226 |
|
| 7227 | <para>The following length can be given with a unit
|
| 7228 | (<code>in</code>, <code>ft</code>, <code>pt</code>, <code>cm</code>
|
| 7229 | or <code>mm</code>).</para>
|
| 7230 |
|
| 7231 | <variablelist>
|
| 7232 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7233 | <term><option>--dist-to-box
|
| 7234 | <replaceable>d</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7235 |
|
| 7236 | <listitem>
|
| 7237 | <para>sets the distance from the boxes (going left) where to
|
| 7238 | write questions scores when using <option>--position
|
| 7239 | case</option>.Defaults to <code>1cm</code>.</para>
|
| 7240 | </listitem>
|
| 7241 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7242 |
|
| 7243 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7244 | <term><option>--dist-margin
|
| 7245 | <replaceable>d</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7246 |
|
| 7247 | <listitem>
|
| 7248 | <para>sets the margin size. Defaults to
|
| 7249 | <code>5mm</code>.</para>
|
| 7250 | </listitem>
|
| 7251 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7252 |
|
| 7253 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7254 | <term><option>--dist-margin-global
|
| 7255 | <replaceable>d</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7256 |
|
| 7257 | <listitem>
|
| 7258 | <para>sets the margin size for the header. Defaults to
|
| 7259 | <code>3mm</code>.</para>
|
| 7260 | </listitem>
|
| 7261 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7262 | </variablelist>
|
| 7263 | </refsect2>
|
| 7264 | </refsect1>
|
| 7265 | </refentry>
|
| 7266 |
|
| 7267 | <refentry>
|
| 7268 | <refmeta>
|
| 7269 | <refentrytitle>AMC-mailing</refentrytitle>
|
| 7270 |
|
| 7271 | <manvolnum>1</manvolnum>
|
| 7272 |
|
| 7273 | <refmiscinfo class="source">Auto Multiple Choice</refmiscinfo>
|
| 7274 |
|
| 7275 | <refmiscinfo class="version">@/PACKAGE_V_DEB/@</refmiscinfo>
|
| 7276 | </refmeta>
|
| 7277 |
|
| 7278 | <refnamediv>
|
| 7279 | <refname>AMC-mailing</refname>
|
| 7280 |
|
| 7281 | <refpurpose>mail PDF annotated completed answer sheets to
|
| 7282 | students</refpurpose>
|
| 7283 | </refnamediv>
|
| 7284 |
|
| 7285 | <refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 7286 | <cmdsynopsis>
|
| 7287 | <command>auto-multiple-choice</command>
|
| 7288 |
|
| 7289 | <arg choice="plain">mailing</arg>
|
| 7290 |
|
| 7291 | <arg>--xmlargs <replaceable>args.xml</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7292 |
|
| 7293 | <arg choice="plain">--project
|
| 7294 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7295 |
|
| 7296 | <arg choice="plain">--students-list
|
| 7297 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7298 |
|
| 7299 | <arg>--list-encoding <replaceable>encoding</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7300 |
|
| 7301 | <arg choice="plain">--email-column
|
| 7302 | <replaceable>col</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7303 |
|
| 7304 | <arg choice="plain">--sender
|
| 7305 | <replaceable>sender-email</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7306 |
|
| 7307 | <arg choice="plain">--subject
|
| 7308 | <replaceable>subject</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7309 |
|
| 7310 | <arg choice="plain">--text
|
| 7311 | <replaceable>email-body</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7312 |
|
| 7313 | <arg>--text-content-type
|
| 7314 | <replaceable>content-type</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7315 |
|
| 7316 | <arg>--debug <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7317 |
|
| 7318 | <arg rep="repeat"><replaceable>transport
|
| 7319 | arguments</replaceable></arg>
|
| 7320 | </cmdsynopsis>
|
| 7321 | </refsynopsisdiv>
|
| 7322 |
|
| 7323 | <refsect1>
|
| 7324 | <title>Description</title>
|
| 7325 |
|
| 7326 | <para>The command <command>AMC-mailing.pl</command> sends by email the
|
| 7327 | PDF annotated completed answer sheets to the students. Email addresses
|
| 7328 | are taken from the students list file.</para>
|
| 7329 |
|
| 7330 | <variablelist>
|
| 7331 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7332 | <term><option>--project
|
| 7333 | <replaceable>project-dir</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7334 |
|
| 7335 | <listitem>
|
| 7336 | <para>Gives the project directory.</para>
|
| 7337 | </listitem>
|
| 7338 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7339 |
|
| 7340 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7341 | <term><option>--students-list
|
| 7342 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7343 |
|
| 7344 | <listitem>
|
| 7345 | <para>sets the students list file name.</para>
|
| 7346 | </listitem>
|
| 7347 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7348 |
|
| 7349 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7350 | <term><option>--list-encoding
|
| 7351 | <replaceable>encoding</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7352 |
|
| 7353 | <listitem>
|
| 7354 | <para>selects an encoding for file
|
| 7355 | <replaceable>students-list.csv</replaceable> (default is
|
| 7356 | utf-8).</para>
|
| 7357 | </listitem>
|
| 7358 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7359 |
|
| 7360 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7361 | <term><option>--email-column
|
| 7362 | <replaceable>col</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7363 |
|
| 7364 | <listitem>
|
| 7365 | <para>sets the name of the column containing the email addresses
|
| 7366 | of the students in the students list file.</para>
|
| 7367 | </listitem>
|
| 7368 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7369 |
|
| 7370 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7371 | <term><option>--sender
|
| 7372 | <replaceable>sender-email</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7373 |
|
| 7374 | <listitem>
|
| 7375 | <para>sets the sender email.</para>
|
| 7376 | </listitem>
|
| 7377 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7378 |
|
| 7379 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7380 | <term><option>--cc
|
| 7381 | <replaceable>cc-email-address</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7382 |
|
| 7383 | <listitem>
|
| 7384 | <para>sets the carbon copy email address.</para>
|
| 7385 | </listitem>
|
| 7386 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7387 |
|
| 7388 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7389 | <term><option>--bcc
|
| 7390 | <replaceable>bcc-email-address</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7391 |
|
| 7392 | <listitem>
|
| 7393 | <para>sets the blind carbon copy email address.</para>
|
| 7394 | </listitem>
|
| 7395 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7396 |
|
| 7397 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7398 | <term><option>--subject
|
| 7399 | <replaceable>subject</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7400 |
|
| 7401 | <listitem>
|
| 7402 | <para>sets the subject of the emails to send.</para>
|
| 7403 | </listitem>
|
| 7404 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7405 |
|
| 7406 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7407 | <term><option>--text
|
| 7408 | <replaceable>email-body</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7409 |
|
| 7410 | <listitem>
|
| 7411 | <para>sets the body text of the emails to send.</para>
|
| 7412 | </listitem>
|
| 7413 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7414 |
|
| 7415 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7416 | <term><option>--text-content-type
|
| 7417 | <replaceable>content-type</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7418 |
|
| 7419 | <listitem>
|
| 7420 | <para>sets the content-type of email text.
|
| 7421 | <replaceable>content-type</replaceable> may be
|
| 7422 | <constant>text/plain</constant> or
|
| 7423 | <constant>text/html</constant>.</para>
|
| 7424 | </listitem>
|
| 7425 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7426 |
|
| 7427 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7428 | <term><option>--attach
|
| 7429 | <replaceable>filename</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7430 |
|
| 7431 | <listitem>
|
| 7432 | <para>adds file <replaceable>filename</replaceable> as an
|
| 7433 | attachment to all emails sent. Use this option several times to
|
| 7434 | attach multiple files.</para>
|
| 7435 | </listitem>
|
| 7436 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7437 |
|
| 7438 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7439 | <term><option>--transport
|
| 7440 | <replaceable>transport</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7441 |
|
| 7442 | <listitem>
|
| 7443 | <para>sets the transport to use.
|
| 7444 | <replaceable>transport</replaceable> may be
|
| 7445 | <constant>sendmail</constant> or
|
| 7446 | <constant>SMTP</constant>.</para>
|
| 7447 | </listitem>
|
| 7448 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7449 |
|
| 7450 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7451 | <term><option>--debug
|
| 7452 | <replaceable>file.log</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7453 |
|
| 7454 | <listitem>
|
| 7455 | <para>gives a file to fill with debugging information.</para>
|
| 7456 | </listitem>
|
| 7457 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7458 | </variablelist>
|
| 7459 | </refsect1>
|
| 7460 |
|
| 7461 | <refsect1>
|
| 7462 | <title>Transport arguments</title>
|
| 7463 |
|
| 7464 | <para>Depending on the value used for argument
|
| 7465 | <replaceable>transport</replaceable>, the following arguments can be
|
| 7466 | added:</para>
|
| 7467 |
|
| 7468 | <refsect2>
|
| 7469 | <title>Transport sendmail</title>
|
| 7470 |
|
| 7471 | <variablelist>
|
| 7472 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7473 | <term><option>--sendmail-path
|
| 7474 | <replaceable>path</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7475 |
|
| 7476 | <listitem>
|
| 7477 | <para>sets the path to the <command>sendmail</command> command
|
| 7478 | (defaults to <filename>/usr/sbin/sendmail</filename>).</para>
|
| 7479 | </listitem>
|
| 7480 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7481 | </variablelist>
|
| 7482 | </refsect2>
|
| 7483 |
|
| 7484 | <refsect2>
|
| 7485 | <title>Transport SMTP</title>
|
| 7486 |
|
| 7487 | <variablelist>
|
| 7488 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7489 | <term><option>--smtp-host
|
| 7490 | <replaceable>host</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7491 |
|
| 7492 | <listitem>
|
| 7493 | <para>sets the SMTP hostname (defaults to
|
| 7494 | <constant>smtp</constant>).</para>
|
| 7495 | </listitem>
|
| 7496 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7497 |
|
| 7498 | <varlistentry>
|
| 7499 | <term><option>--smtp-port
|
| 7500 | <replaceable>port</replaceable></option></term>
|
| 7501 |
|
| 7502 | <listitem>
|
| 7503 | <para>sets the port to use (default value is 25).</para>
|
| 7504 | </listitem>
|
| 7505 | </varlistentry>
|
| 7506 | </variablelist>
|
| 7507 | </refsect2>
|
| 7508 | </refsect1>
|
| 7509 |
|
| 7510 | <refsect1>
|
| 7511 | <title>Arguments in a XML file</title>
|
| 7512 |
|
| 7513 | <para>To avoid encoding problems, one can place some arguments in a
|
| 7514 | XML file and use the <option>--xmlargs
|
| 7515 | <replaceable>file.xml</replaceable></option> argument as the first
|
| 7516 | command argument. Here is an example of such a file:</para>
|
| 7517 |
|
| 7518 | <programlisting><?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
|
| 7519 | <arguments>
|
| 7520 | <arg>--sender</arg><arg>Bienvenüe &lt;paamc@passoire.fr&gt;</arg>
|
| 7521 | <arg>--text</arg><arg>Voilà votre copie corrigée</arg>
|
| 7522 | <arg>--subject</arg><arg>QCM</arg>
|
| 7523 | </arguments></programlisting>
|
| 7524 | </refsect1>
|
| 7525 | </refentry>
|
| 7526 | </sect1>
|
| 7527 | </article>
|